Home

Dental System by 3 shape

1. 254 21 57 2E crc 257 5 6 5 2 uM NENNEN xr 259 57 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE HOW TO UPDATE AND CONFIGURE YOUR SYSTEM ssssssseeesssssssreeessssssrrressssssrrrersssssssree 260 5 7 1 Upprade of previous msta llatioN sche cried ornoak Kaaa E aaaea Ri Eia enaa aia Ea 261 SE usine NES E e ser E E E EE 261 sa Da T A ee ee 263 5 7 1 3 DentalManager and 3Shape Dongle Service installation esee 263 5 7 1 4 DentalManager and Microsoft SQL server installation eese 263 3S 1 JlgbDeJOUsle oe CE eee ene Ne re 9 10 9 2 3 0 8 0 0 RE eters Saree ease ne ne ane Eee et steerer 265 3 70 Upda line Maternals SENOS eon nica ci cu uito E de nien lc LS tances D Lupe iiccA eire ie 265 3 17 Edge SIE SORTIS ace cetera iue PUMP DM MEME mU Dd M E 266 5 7 2 a aea E o s orca pe DUE MM AM E A N TI N I ita cages 266 5 7 3 Inspection of Dental System Control Panel settings sssssneeeeeneme nennen nennen 266 eol TeV Sell I NR mE 266 SM R edits key TICS ARE o mm 267 SM XN ME eroi cates gid E RET 268 Sob OU CE CIOS 250 535222 009530 25 0355 095650 0 3 655 55 mOsU en ibus ue uod benadUS aa ade enu A 268 SMS MEM SC SI o A A 270 ESTIS T 270 3 59 7 Manufacturing DIOCOSSES uuiceoeciere tirer praet Reino Roe ephe d Pens bead einna arrear d Leap bead siras ariii etre Un 2142 wc MEMO n O EP
2. aaga 238 50 5 8 Optional omponents NIRE ERE ERR anaiari deiina arriera narri sirsa ariani sania 239 5 6 5 9 Wax ups and Wax up bridges ccccccccsssssssssssssssssssssssssssssessasssasseeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeaaeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 240 a Re dE RR IE E OPORTERE m EEEE 241 5 6 5 11 NOMIC 9 c 242 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark 6 Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 5 6 5 12 OTIS OE PRRRRCRERRRNTT P 243 5 6 5 13 Fdo Dues TIS MR ur 247 5 6 14 T pcap DANES sete csc as ise cep dete hab sue SeDessec oe Ceb tisonop oe b Da bee bru indt Da pedit odas de D Dub he pru E inscia pet ediupss 247 5 6 5 15 Diplo 33506 HIS odoris es gases ssa cence ete ea ec ects cents accent pa DIM E EUN RE ER decane 248 5 6 5 16 Preparing CAD files Tor implant systems 2oicsosecssceveciecececedecavaceocbasanectinudesussdeacetisenstanctedeocdesssetecetindac s 249 5 6 5 17 Implant system coordinate system CODSIEIBIS oou oo tto io icio oido eu quio c cintura cer bene eee bereitet 251 5 6 5 18 Importing implant systems and abutment kits using the Control Panel eeeesesesssss 253 5 6 5 19 Mun I E
3. 213 S Ma e E E E EEE EE A EE AE E 274 5 7 4 Send and receive orders Inbox add on module esses nnns 274 5 7 4 1 Receiver Inbox add on module required sisc0 5 s5csss5 sncsensesstansaalann ocasgeesdeauasacosaedsaccecoescabenneeeauessuonadenasenees 274 5 7 4 2 Sender preconfigured Inbox add on module not required cccccceeeeeeessseessssssssssssssssssssssssssseeaaeas 276 5 7 4 3 Sender manual configuration Inbox add on module not required 0 0 0 0 eeeeeseeeseeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 276 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark 7 Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved p 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape 1 DentalManager 1 1 Foreword This chapter describes 3Shape DentalManager The purpose of the chapter is to direct the user through the main functions and interfaces of the software It is assumed that the reader is familiar with a Windows operating environment System Requirements Operating System Windows XP SP2 SP3 or Windows Vista SP1 Processor Intel Core 2 Duo 2 0GHz or higher is recommended RAM 1GB minimum 2GB recommended Graphics Card with OpenGL 2 0 support and at least 256 MB of memory HDD 80GB or larger Network Network Internet connection Mouse with wheel button support The 3Shape DentalManager is part of th
4. Figure 1 4 Create new Order You will be prompted by the Order form depicted in Figure 1 5 13 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved gt 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 UserMamual ADOT 1 2 2 1 Process Order Form Lab information Order settings Scan settings Operator Andrea Steven w Order number d1000 20080828 1503 Smith Importance Normal v Antagonist Client information Client John Doe Neighborhood scan ient Contact person Create date 8 28 2008 Order settings Shipping date 8 28 2008 v P Patient information i EN Crown e Last name Smith First name John l l Teeth overview le Comments map i Yellow model green box Restoration keys oee eed amp Index Additional Figure 1 5 Order Form The following information describes the various fields in the Order Form e Lab information This field is reserved for the operator s name An operator can be chosen from a list that has to be filled in the DSCP for more details see chapter 5 6 1 Interface e Client information Here the user can add all the information related to the client the order is being made for To use this option the client and its data have to be previously registered in the Dental System Control Panel The user can also import sites from an Excel file to the DSCP see c
5. ccccccceecccccseccceeeccccusecsccusecscueccscuescscuusececuscsseueecscuueecssuecsssuecessueecesuecseaeeeeees 47 1 4 1 Label Printing in DentalManager sssssssssssssseeeeneIene eene enne ene nennen nene eene nennen nnne nnne nennen enne nennen 47 1 4 2 Barcode Core 000 e 48 2 IN KNER ascension wees nw en os seas eT tax IM cT IMP Net 49 2 1 MOE WOR qp strc rc stesso 49 22 E Os ci dra NN IN OESIE IEAA ONS EIE IEA A N AN EET AEA TEN AT EEA TN 50 2 3 THE DENTALDESIGNER USER INTERFACE soriire n aaa A AAAA OPERAR ERE 5 2 3 1 DET OD Alls ERR 52 2 3 2 Using Mouse and Keyboard E 53 23 3 COMET VIC OO Oe RERO 56 2 3 4 PEO 295 WOO DAM e R E mm 57 AL CUI oars a sess sss E E E 57 VADE SAMMELN T mcm 57 2345 ise neo ROCA 57 2 3 5 PY TW GOO MD RR RRRRRRK 58 Tal CC ERER 58 VAL MEME GRIS 10 Nm 58 Ye ae es ME rise 1101010 1 ee oe ee oe ee een E e eemm 58 2 4 ATHE MODBLELING POC oats spn sutt ness cetera RU ned DE senate des ecumnig nh ee UNE nao E SUETON A 59 2 4 1 Eccculis qH5 DEODEOL s crai T Pn ee 61 2 4 2 VICE OU 61 2 4 3 eur re M DI COIT E 63 LAS oio Net 63 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark 3 Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E ma
6. Pont 25 QD resin cy uem LSS BIC e a TCU 3shape dct tricked well eae Pon daina i Figure 2 147 Intersection of crowns in a crown bridge without connectors 136 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual ings KJ haetaa Rm Wi 6 7 LS SRI Figure 2 148 Crown bridge with connectors e The function of Placement overview is available for the user to be able to control the alignment of the crowns and the pontics in a full crown bridge o Apart from the modifications applied to the separate items of the bridge from the dialog box the user may adjust the shape of the whole bridge manually The green spline on the top of the crown restoration defined by a number of blue control points marks the upper border of the bridge Figure 2 149 It is intended to help the user to conveniently locate the changes applied visually Figure 2 149 Placement overview spline defined by control points 137 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved pe 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3sha pe Rotate the model accordingly to see its horizontal and vertical dimensions The active section of the bridge i e the one that is to be modified is marked with a yellow control point upon selecting Move the blue control points to replace the active section of the b
7. DentalManager emote license management server http f Paww 3shape com LicenseMan 4f Installed A i a ae eet Update key file af Installed a Dongle License Server of installed 3shape Dongle Service A Order Directory J Installed 3BrviCB STILUS The service is installed and running on tnis PC Output Directory Bee e Vd xEHBLTNS E cmm a es OMPUTe Harie M ie pcos This Pr J Directory set Donge service port eg Test connection J Open status page Configure services Data output directories amp fe Figure 5 105 System Settings 5 7 3 2 Remote license key files The Remote license management server is 3Shape s central server for administrating communication key files These key files are amongst others used for communication between sites e g when sending orders to a central milling center and to specify the output options for the current site For standard non encrypted installations the key files are not necessary in order to send orders between sites However your Software Provider might define some settings for you to make communication between sites easier e g specifying a number of central milling centers that can manufacture your orders or provide you with additional options e g output for new manufacturing machines and in this case updated key files are obtained by pressing the Update key file button 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark 267 Phone 45 70 27 26
8. General Scanners General Scanners Scanning Scanner selection Cut off height From die top 12 E Current scanner scansrv d21xx ip address 192 168 1568 99 Add scanner Ea list Save ype dem Remove current scanner From list Remove keep raw scan data Save Figure 3 7 General amp Scanners Tabs e General o Cut off Height The scan height from the top of the tooth is defined here default 12 o Save Type Can be preset here DCM 1s recommended for DentalDesigner o Keep raw scan data Saves Point Cloud data as extra recommended e Scanners o Current Scanner The PC the scanner is linked to should be named here o Add Remove Locations of various scanning computers can be added using these buttons 168 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved T S 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape 3 6 Order Form The Order Form allows the configuration of the specific order to be defined We strongly recommend users to create the new and open the existing orders using DentalManager Orders created in DentalDesigner or ScanItRestoration will not be in the DentalManager database Refer to the DentalManager Create an Order chapter for defining a dental order 3 How to scan The aim of the 3D scanner and its associated scanning software 1s to provide detailed 3D computer models of physical objects such as teeth and related objects This section describes how
9. Create date Order settings Shipping date Last mame Firsk name Comments O Telescope sshape Model Mone bal System Bridge Type L Wikal w Wital 4 3 mm NewGroup Mewiaraup Additional Figure 1 14 Creating several groups of abutments Click on OK when the order has been set up as desired The order is stored into the database and handled by the DentalManager 24 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 1 2 2 3 Modify an Existing Order Orders that have been created but not scanned yet can be modified as shown on Figure 1 15 However if the status is Scanned or later the order can be opened in Read Only mode In addition these orders can be viewed by selecting 3D Preview see Figure 1 16 3Shape Dental Manager sshape DER Options Help ie jr ej Search gg Orders r By date x l Jj Today m TY Last two days al Last week m Last two weeks by By status w Created Scanned 3 Other filters Checked out uu All open Creation date Delivery date Client 7 30 2008 10 5 7 30 2008 4 7 30 2008 11 2 7 30 2008 Next amp Scan Ctri 5 8 1 2008 3 21 8 1 2008 Et 1 ImportScan Ctrl Alt I 4 8 4 2008 2 14 8 4 2008 New Ctrl N E Modify k Ctrl M Check Out Ctrl U t Delete
10. Points scanned 13281 Please select detailed scan area Figure 3 34 Select area for designing 3 8 4 Re align scan abutments Optionally abutments can be re aligned when all scanning is finished Click on a tooth for which the abutment should be re aligned on the overview window in the upper left corner as shown in the left figure below and a button will be displayed as highlighted in the right figure below A window for alignment will be activated when this button is clicked on Scanning and Saving Align CAD model for finished abutment 12 Reon ver ine RICH nocti Aq z erry b ti ae gt amp a gt d e e e t T o e a i 31 s S e Vas se Senne Aner L1 Z Men CAD model f r abutment 12 Figure 3 35 Re align a scan abutment 3 7 9 Wax up bridge scan Once an order has been defined on the Order Form refer to the DentalManager chapter for details the user will be prompted to insert the arch with wax up bridges mounted The wax up bridge for detailed scanning should be selected after a rough selection scan The scanning process is similar to that of bridge scanning Upon completion of this scan the user needs to remove the wax up bridge and scan the bridge The third scan is only for the wax up bridge The user should mount the wax up bridge on the specially designed fixture Since the wax up bridge often needs to be painted before scanning it is important to ensure that the strings of
11. lt a New Modify check In a 3D Preview a gt Refresh Select Advanced Print Scanned Delivery date 28 07 2008 29 07 2008 30 07 2008 30 07 2008 Ctrl N Ctrl M Ctrl H Ctrl F5 der number di000 20080730 1125 Status Created Modelled Created Scanned Modelled Closed Unlock Sent Shipping date 28 07 2008 29 07 2008 30 07 2008 30 07 2008 01 08 2008 Manufacturer Default Manufa Default Manufa Default Manufa Default Manufa Default Manufa Items Materie Coping 11 21 Zirkon Coping 12 22 Zirkon Crown 11 21 Zirkon Coping 11 Cro Crown 26 l 1 Items Selected Checked Out Shipping date 30 07 2008 Receive date 30 07 2008 turer Default Manufacturer Crown 11 ManufacturerDefaulti den 3shape gt Figure 1 38 Reset Order Status 41 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved gt 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape 1 2 8 Help Menu The help menu in the top right corner contains various options as language settings license information open log file and sends bug report These are described further on 3Shape Dental Manager Orders Inbox Afk Options Heip p ei EX 14 Order s in Inbox Search OOO 7 1 I agi Orders Order number Creation date Delivery date Client Items PT By date License Information Send Bug Report Open
12. Ctrl T 3 28 200 28 200 New Ctrh N oe anes T l amp j28 200i aue Modify Ctrl M Ctrl I Ez Re Madel CEri Alk O Export To File Ctrl E Zirkon Last two days a Last week aw Last two weeks E S check Out Ctrl U Export To FTP Ctrl F By statu Ly y status 3D Preview Ctrl Export To Mail Ctrl L Created 7X Delete Export ERP File Ctrl F q Refresh Explore Order F4 Select Explore CAM Shift F4 um Advanced Generate CAM keput FF d 1000 _ 200808 Ao er meg nt 6 5 mm n date 8 28 2008 Jjent aiume 139 mmi late 8 28 2008 Patient Crown 26 Default Mani VE is 8 28 2008 Material Zirkon 3 S h a p Figure 1 32 Generate CAM Output 1 2 7 5 Export orders Orders can be exported from the system to a file FTP or by mail The selected orders are compressed and handed to the desired export control see e g Figure 34 38 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3Shape Dental Manager Sie Orders Inbox Options Help ieerzIzp am m GA 14 Order s in Inbox A Number Orders Client Items di000 2 x gt Crown 26 OP lay By date s F6 d1000 Bridge 13 21 3 Today s 2 Send to Manufacturer Ctrl T 3 Last two days ps 11000 ue New Ctri N LI d1000_ Modify Ctrl M Coping 15 14 L2 Re Model Ctrl Alt O Crown 17 1 LE T Lastweek T Last two
13. The Maintain angle slide bar defines the importance of the Angle value With a high value the angular difference described above is the important parameter in the margin line algorithm while lower values result in the local curvature of the die being more important in the margin line algorithm This is illustrated in Figure 2 42 and Figure 2 43 whereby the local curvature is taken into consideration in the latter figure The Smoothing slide bar defines the amount of post processing applied to the automatically extracted spline Increasing the amount of smoothing provides a smoother spline but reduces the importance of the angular difference described above this 1s also observed in Figure 2 42 and Figure 2 43 The Show graphics checkbox enables or disables the advanced graphics shown in Figure 2 41 to Figure 2 43 The Set margin direction button defines the direction which best represents the current die and this direction is always visualized with a yellow arrow as shown in Figure 2 39 By default this direction 1s similar to the insertion direction and it rarely needs to be changed for single copings or other dental items For bridgeworks however one or more dies may have an overall orientation significantly different from the insertion direction and by changing this parameter a significantly improved spline may be automatically extracted 19 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Denta
14. Type v M po Bridge Figure 1 11 Menu with Material choice for each Restoration 21 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual Order Form Lab information Order settings T Order number Importance Operator Client information Client none Contack person Create date gf 1 2008 Scan settings 1000 20080901 1147 Mbject EvEE Model Normal w Antagonist None Double preparation F Relative position Shipping date a 1 2008 Patient information Last name First name Comments Index Additional Ea a Bridge Figure 1 12 Order Form Menu to define the Bridge The abutments can be arranged in groups with each group having its common insertion direction New in 2008 1 This allows to model upper structures on top of customized abutments the resulting customized abutments will be in parallel by default as long as the Top cap is not rotated during the modelling In order to define a group select the desired teeth with the cursor and choose the New Group from the Abutment drop down menu Should a second group of abutments be created it would have an incremental number See Figure 1 13 22 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual Order Form Lab information Order settings Scan settings Operator Andrea Steven Order number i
15. a om 8 We m Qu Ss Y F gt je ey e ty e e e e 8 e amp eoo 2 LE AN Iu se J sshape M Figure 1 19 ScanItRestoration For detailed description of ScanItRestoration please refer to the chapter ScanItRestoration 1 2 3 1 Import Scan As an alternative to ScanItRestoration the scan can be imported to the system Select mport Scan and the open dialog depicted in Figure 1 20 1s prompted pen preperation scan index 21 3 Crown 26 m E Oo T gt AntagonistScan PreperationScan My Recent Documents Intra oral scan File name PreperationScan My Network Files of type Scan files der amp stl 1 hps Figure 1 20 Import Scan 28 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 1 2 4 Model Order sshape Select an order having the status Scanned and Select Model or double click the order see Figure 1 21 to launch DentalDesigner see When finished modelling click on save in the DentalDesigner and close the application The order is now modelled and ready for export or manufacturing For detailed description of DentalDesigner please refer to chapter 2 DentalDesigner a 3Shape Dental Manager Orders EE Options Help oJ a Search A Al SPEEMEE agi Orders T gt By date 3 Today ind Last two days wi Last week 3
16. e Select contact points by selecting none one or two in the window the user can choose how many contact points are to be used To place the contact points left click on the surface of the neighbouring tooth where the contact with the crown will occur 3 3Shape d1000 20080926 1343 d1000_20080926_1343 xml File View Help SEQ 2582 Design E i aw eo ty 9323 e e yj a A shape Standa a i era ox a Contact points 1 A None an a Two ie b Crown 16 Finish Ys Remove artefacts A Margin line Modify crown Addjremove material Bb EN Figure 2 127 Load crown 122 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual Modify crown This is the part of the crown modelling process where the user can define the shape of the anatomical crown To finish the modify crown process the user has to go through several steps all shown in Figure 2 128 Below is a short explanation of all the steps DentalDesigner File View Help B s Design Back Mext eo amp de Crown 16 Qro ff Remove artefacts JA Marain line A Die interface HM Load crown r Add remove material WPCO3A3S 3E TE 67 hape d1000 20080926 1343141000 20080926 1343 xml Edit the margin line cut spline on the library tooth Use deform box to change crown shap
17. CE Tr refarmabon O Transformation Tentation mede Cire lacs O Deformation Define the boundary of the top cap Mephrsdus 200m 5 Edit top cap boundary Hinni made e a n Clear spline d 1 2Delumalion CO Ert ton cop boundary Top cap shape Information information Show top cap angle Shaw top cap angle Show top cap undercuts Show top cep undercuts isi 5 Collisions between models Collisions between models Collisions Lice scot undo Lnd 0 All Collisions andl uabercul resulting from the incorrect marl Figure 2 173 Edit top cap boundary Figure 2 174 Show collisions top angle and undercuts 3 5 X4 Add remove material See chapter 2 5 6 4 Assembly Overview The option to see the abutment assembly is provided in order to improve and refine the internal structure of the abutment top cap being modelled in accordance with screw specifications and drilling manufacturing instructions 156 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual Process sshape 4 Assembly Click the button on the Process toolbar A dialog box will appear Choose the Use screw hole option to create a screw hole from the top of the abutment top cap This should be set by default Define the Vertical screw offset and the Extra drill radius in the dialog box in mm To see how the changes made influence the visual appearance of the mode
18. Figure 5 11 Miscellaneous settings The Gradient Background Color allows the user to define the background color in ScanItRestoration and DentalDesigner 5 4 Administrative Settings The Administrative Settings section of the Dental System Control Panel contains options for updating dongles Both a local dongle connected to the local PC and a remote dongle connected to the 3Shape Dongle Service PC can be updated The dongles and the Dongle Service is the licensing tool for the 3Shape Dental System applications and all applications use floating licenses to offer maximum flexibility for the users For further information about the dongles please look in the separate Dongle User Manual for Dental Applications document When entering the Administrative Settings from the main menu the following screen will appear 211 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 User Manual VI Dental System Control Panel Administrative setting cil J Back Y Home P Save 3shape Tasks AX E d P Figure 5 12 Administrative Settings 5 4 1 Dongle Update The Dongle Update can be used to update any dongle that is in the host computer at that time Please note that only one dongle should be in the machine at any time Once the Dongle Update button is clicked the following screen will be displayed D nt stem Control Pan Mm paat x b i Save Navigation Home gt Administr
19. Telescope Figure 1 9 9 Unit bridge defined consisting of crowns and pontics 19 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual Order Form Lab information Order settings Scan settings Operator Andrea Steven w Order number diDOD 20080901 1 141 Sbjech type Model Importance Normal v Antagonist None V Client information Double preparation F Neighborhood scan Client John Doe w g Contact person Create date 9 1 2008 m Order settings Shipping date af 1 2008 v Patient information Last name Smith First name John Comments Standard Anatomical Waxup single unit Index Additional Figure 1 10 Menu with choice of Coping type 20 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 5 Order Form Lab information rder settings Operator Andrea Steven Order number Importance Client information Client John Doe Contact person Order settings Create date af ijz n8 Shipping date of 1 2008 Patient information Last name Smith First name John Comments Index Additional digan 70080901 1141 Scan settings Model Double preparation Relative position Object type ntagonist Manufacturing process Milling Ir Material zirkon es Manufacturer Coping zr E
20. e The Rotation mode specifies how the pontic is rotated If the Axis rotation is checked the rotation will occur in a given plane illustrated by a yellow circle see Figure 2 74 while Free rotation results in a fully free rotation according to the mouse movement see Figure 2 75 e The Morph radius decides the radius used when modifying morphing the pontic model e The Morph mode changes the edit mode to surface morphing In this mode the box is removed see Figure 2 76 the silhouette of the pontic is drawn and the mouse position is visualized by a circle which marks the radius being affected by morphing The pontic can then be morphed by dragging the silhouette the silhouette turns green when the mouse position is close enough or by dragging the surface to and fro see Figure 2 78 Pontic collisions e When the Show collisions box is checked collisions between the pontic model and the other visible models are shown This is illustrated in Figure 2 77 97 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual Pontic Pontic Rotate around axes Rotate in all directions Manual transformation Rotation mode Free Morph radius 2 00mm Morph mode go m F Collisions between models Collisions between models Automatic transformation Adjust to cap neighbours C Show neighbour adjustment lines Distance tosid
21. Add button you can specify the Inbox folder requires read and write access FTP IP address etc according to the figure below All these settings are for the receiver s access to your own FTP server Your customers sending orders to you require similar FTP settings on their site see below 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark 274 Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved gt Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 User Manual 3sha pe Dental System Control Panel lal Save E Back Navigation Home Dental Manager Table Manufacturing Inbox The Manufacturing Order Inbox is used for receiving extern orders The orders are placed an FTP from where they can be downloaded to a temporary folder for validation The orders are ready to be put inta the DentalManager system LocalInbox 1 Inbox folder C 3shapeMnbox FTP IP address URL name FTP port 21 P Hide inactive items F H M Delete FTF secure socket v W Move up Active Ivi Move down Test connection Figure 5 114 Specifying an Inbox in the Dental System Control Panel NOTE For the Inbox module to function it is important that you have specified the settings correctly and that the FTP server has been set up correctly By pressing the Test connection button you will be able to test most of the requirements If everything is functioning you will see a green
22. Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual sshape e The shape and location of the pontic can be defined according to the neighbouring copings if available The following settings are available through the Adjust to cap neighbours group o The Show neighbour adjustment lines toggles the lines between the two neighbouring copings on and off only if copings are available These lines are best evaluated when seen from above see Figure 2 65 o The Scale to fit neighbours button transforms the model so that it fits the two neighbouring copings if available The distance to the neighbouring elements after the transformation is specified in the Distance to sides value Figure 2 65 o The Move to manual position button can be applied if the DentalDesigner provides an inaccurate default guess of the location The new location is based on the user defined annotation point 8 DentalDesigner PC81 3Shape Dental System Orders MANUAL_1__20070614_1024 MANUAL_1_20070614 1024xml W File View Help ax m a ay T 389 Gi BMD Pontic Model visibility x rs MC a RE moe SE Scans Design i Manual transformation a 4 Preperation E Qs _ Rotation mode Free VJ Axis C Antagonist m Morph radius 2 0mm J i Placement 24 26 Morph med E CM T Aut t i A e t Collisions between mo
23. HM Dos a 26 T inic t Clin IER efault Clinic sshape TO 2D slice view 2 Process e Click the button on the Process toolbar A dialog box will appear e Using the paint selection tool a portion of the model can be selected by holding down the left mouse button and moving the mouse over the model e Using the spline selection tool a closed area of the model can be selected by placing a sequence of control points on the model e By default the spline selection tool processes the inside of the specified spline The inside of the spline is defined as the area enclosed when traversing the control points of the spline in a clockwise direction To switch the direction of the spline use the Swap dir button e Click OK or Apply for the selected part of the model to be removed and replaced by a smooth surface patch 71 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved gt 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape e The radius of the paint selection tool can be changed using the slider under Advanced The effect of smoothing the model surface 1s illustrated in three steps in Figure 2 36 Figure 2 37 and Figure 2 38 Figure 2 36 1 Initial surface Figure 2 37 2 Marked area Figure 2 38 3 After removal 2 5 3 Margin line Overview The aim of this step is to define the exact margin line for the item being modelled A well defined margin line is essential for obtaining a go
24. Last two weeks by By status u Created Order number di000_20 9 di000 20 S dio00 20 diO00 20 d1000_20 30 07 2008 10 30 07 2008 11 Create date 21 07 2008 14 21 07 2008 16 28 07 2008 11 28 07 2008 12 29 07 2008 15 Delivery date 21 07 2008 21 07 2008 28 07 2008 28 07 2008 29 07 2008 30 07 2008 30 07 2008 Scanned imber d1000_20080729_1534 jate 29 07 2008 q date 29 07 2008 e date 29 07 2008 iufacturer Default Manufacturer ent Materia Zirkon Coping 12 ManufacturerDefault1 Coping 22 ManufacturerDefault1 Shipping date 21 07 2008 21 07 2008 28 07 2008 28 07 2008 Modify VK Re Scan 4 check out E 3D Preview x Delete Aa Refresh Select Advanced Print Reset Manufacturer Default Manufa Default Manufa Default Manufa Default Manufa Ctrl N Ctrl M Ckriz Alt R Ctrl U Ctrl Items Crown 16 14 Crown 11 Bridge 11 21 Coping 11 21 Coping 12 22 Zirkon Figure 1 21 Model Order 29 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved pe 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 UserMamual 3Shape El DentalDesigner WJpcO33ShapeYd1000 20080729 1534141000 20080729 1534 xml EIE File View Help a 389 GA Balt Finalize d Je 6 i Jj W A 8 ME e idtm PS Sow e2 Figure 1 22 Mode
25. WIELAND MEK saamaa Dental System by 3 shape gt User Manual Version 2008 1 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved p 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape Introduction 3Shape Dental System is a unique combination of 3Shape s expertise in 3D scanning and 3D CAD software for creating accurate customized dental restorations The manual describes 3Shape Dental System that includes the following products DentalManager DentalDesigner scanltRestoration ScanItLibrary and Dental System Control Panel For upgrade and configuration of 3Shape Dental System please refer to the System Maintenance how to upgrade and configure your system chapter in this manual 3Shape Dental System is completely open output files are in a standard format and offers the most advanced 3D technology packed into a very user friendly interface It allows scanning full casts dies implants or wax ups automatically to easily design copings full anatomical crowns bridge frameworks or implant abutments from the scans Customized abutments bars and implant bridges are sold separately as an add on module called AbutmentDesigner 3Shape Dental System gives you the possibility to manufacture products on any suitable equipment and materials as well as benefit from the increased number of outsourcing production centres Please Note The purpose of the man
26. e Press Apply to attach the component or OK to finish If no attachment point is visualized no component will be attached when closing the dialog box Attach dental components Settings Min dist to interface 1 Adjustande EEN ay Tl Figure 2 113 Choose component Attach dental components Settings Mame Thickening 1 Min dist to interface 0 95 Adjust angle J mcm 73873 Figure 2 115 Adjust minimum interface distance Attach dental components n MX O UR Settings a y Name Thickening 1 v Min dist to interface 1 00 fe mm Adjust angle U y Figure 2 114 Adjust insertion angle Attach dental components LCS a Settings Name Thickening 1 Min dist to interface 0 85 mm Adjust angle He P Clear Figure 2 116 Apply 112 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved gt 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3sha pe 2 5 12 Wax up This section describes the operations dedicated to the manipulation of a wax up 2 5 12 1 Wax up Overview The wax up step connects a previously scanned wax up with a modelled interface The parameters used for building the wax up are defined in the current materials file generated by the Dental System Control Panel but can a
27. t p 1 Manipulate shape aya 6 m j v Auto connector preview e 9 Graphic values eh ae IF Yd kena e cy 9 o eis te rend a e E a ma E e iJ d 6 ex amp pm MNT or PF mb So Connector 44 c 45 Finish Intersection Jg Length 1 86 mm H Edit connector Connector Collisions Y Order Bridge 43 4 Clinic Default Clinic T E77 AME In A C i E z s Lingual Ue Figure 2 79 Defining the connector with the 2D intersection area shown in the View toolbar Process e Click the Edit connector button in the Process toolbar automatically pressed when creating a connector file for the first time A dialog box will appear e DentalDesigner automatically defines the shape of the connector using the default shape defined in the ControlPanel Silhouette Circular amp mm Circular amm Silhouette Using the Name dropdown box other predefined connector shapes can be selected and then scaled using the Scale factor in the Settings panel Two standard connector shapes are illustrated in Figure 2 86 and Figure 2 87 Besides circular and elliptical connectors there are also silhouette connectors which are frequently used 100 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape e DentalDesigner automatically places the connector usi
28. A calibration is performed using the dot plate calibration object and the square calibration object supplied with your scanner see Figure 3 1 and Figure 3 3 Figure 3 1 D250 calibration objects 162 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved gt 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape Figure 3 2 D640 calibration objects To calibrate the scanner 1 Press the Calibrate scanner button on the ScanServer window in the lower right part of the screen You will be prompted for a password which is docal The reason for the password is to keep unauthorized personnel from trying to calibrate the scanner 2 A new window opens Follow the detailed instructions in this window which will guide you through the full calibration process 163 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved p 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape 3 4 Transportation To avoid damage to the scanner during transportation the original packing material and boxes should always be used when the scanner is transported The tilt axis of the scanner should also be secured If the original packing materials have been lost a new set should be ordered from 3Shape 3 4 1 Transportation of the D250 Scanner To mount the plate simply press the Transport pos button in the ScanServer program This places the linear axis in the right position Then close down the ScanServer software and mount the trans
29. Denmark Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com 3shape Ctrl P F4 Shift F4 F7 F8 Shift F8 F9 CtrI R 12 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 1 2 2 Create an Order Table 1 DentalManager shortcut keys Select New to create a new order Either in top toolbar or in the right click menu 3Shape Dental Manager sshape PEK Options Help Search v Orders om Orders l o By date 3 Today us Last two days m T Last week T Last two weeks by By status e Created W Scanned T Other filters Checked out Im All open Order number W di000 20 p d1000 20 LOWE d1000 20 Y d1000 20 Wi d1000 20 Create date 28 07 2008 11 28 07 2008 12 29 07 2008 15 30 07 2008 10 30 07 2008 11 Delivery date Status Shipping date 28 07 2008 Scanned 28 07 2008 28 07 2008 Created 28 07 2008 29 07 2008 Scanned 29 07 2008 30 07 2008 Scanned 30 07 2008 30 07 2008 Scanned 30 07 2008 New iu Ra Refresh Select d Advanced d Print d Manufacturer Default Manufa Default Manufa Default Manufa Default Manufa Default Manufa Items Bridge 11 21 Coping 11 21 Coping 12 22 Crown 11 21 Coping 11 Cro Material Zirkon Zirkon Zirkon Zirkon Zirkon
30. IC Fontici Material Arkon ag Color A3 F Pontic library path p Pontic library path 7 ilnc sisshape Dental SystermDental System Control Panel libranyv3shape Pantics Figure 5 68 Pontic item data interface Other than the Material ID the Pontic item data include a path to a folder containing a complete set of pontic models in the STL or DCM format The default Pontic item is linked to a 3Shape pontic library The path can be changed by clicking on the path name which will open a folder browser NOTE It is possible to create and use customised pontics but some guidelines regarding the orientation of the models must be followed The anatomical pontics can also be added for anatomical coping bridges The 3Shape ScanItPontic application can be used for scanning waxed up customised pontics and adding them to the system for later use in DentalDesigner 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark 242 Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved gt Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 User Manual 3sha pe 5 6 5 12 Connectors The Connector items specify shape settings for connector construction elements The Connector item data interface is illustrated in 69 and 70 for different connector type shapes Edit Connector Edit Connector ID LinkTypeConnectors ID Link TypeConnector1 Mame Marn
31. Lab information is set to non visible the information items in that group i e Lab operator will all be invisible in the Order Form Note that some check boxes are disabled These are mandatory and cannot be changed M Order Form settings G iv iv Gl iv I ra iv iv iv iv rJ iv iv lv iv E m a m a m r2 Tr ra E lv lv m a iv ra iv Figure 5 8 Order Form Settings visible and enabled information We can also define a naming template for the identification of each order as shown in Figure 5 9 Order Form Settings order ID template This identification will be the name of both the order data folder and the production data folder see section 5 3 7 stored as a subfolder in the order directory The template consists of 8 fields each specifying a substring in the name in the chosen sequential order 209 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual Define template for order ID generation Use internal ID for order ID generation Order ID template field 1 Siteld wl using All Is characters where spacing string is Order ID template field 2 wa Using All a characters where spacing string is Crder I0 template field 3 Time Using All a characters where spacing string is Order ID template field 4 Operator Wi Using All at Characters where spacing string is Order ID template field 5 Dentist wl Using Al characters where spacing string is Crde
32. Order settings Scan settings f Operator i Order number 20070608 1652 Object type Model L Lab v Extern Order number Antagonist y hat s ETAT 1 OOGGNGG ic Double preparation Relative position Clinic Default Clinic i Contact person M Order date 08 06 2007 Delivery date oo 06 2007 Clinic order na ij Delivery type Ship to different address Shipping address Method cmmmum Coping r Denmark Patient information Lask name First name Reference Comments q Circular Emm hd Additional Figure 2 121 Wax up single unit selection 116 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual Lab information Order settings Order number Martin s Lab AU 7 i Am Operator n Lab Extern Order number Importance e I Clinic information Default Clinic al L Clinic Order settings a Order date 08 06 2007 ivi 09 06 2007 sl Delivery date Clinic order na Delivery type Ship to different address Shipping address Denmark Patient information Last name First name Reference Comments Additianal Scan settings CS I SL LLLZAI1NTOLA i 20070608_ 1652 Object type Ankagonist i Relative position Figure 2 122 Selecting the wax up bridge Model
33. Show colour map which can be found in the Add remove material modelling operation step See chapter 2 5 6 for details NOTE The color scale however is not adjustable here The default acceptable value of the color scale is set to 0 00 mm its default maximum value to 1 50 mm NOTE The OK button finishes the design of an individual customized abutment AbutmentDesigner will then automatically switch to the next element of the modelling job first all abutments then copings pontics etc that is not yet finished You can come back to the abutment at any time either by clicking on the abutment and pushing the P tment button in the Overview toolbar or by clicking on the actual model in the modelling window J Edit bar Overview The Edit bar step allows the user to easily model complex bar structures insuring a high level of precision and parallelism Within the step several parameters allow the user to control parameters such as bar profile size and distance to gingiva The bar is finally cut to the gingival profile following the scan shape Bar profiles are fully customisable Moreover new symmetrical and asymmetrical bar profiles can be created using a large number of defining points Eventually the bar is combined with the customised abutment s in one complete output model keeping the screw holes intact during the whole process The option to edit the shape of the bar for the customized abutment bridge
34. Starts a new modelling session if no current modelling process is active 4 i Load modelling Loads a previously created modelling session from file Save modelling Saves the current modelling session to file Separator Order stage Skips to the stage for entering order specific data and defining the desired modelling process Directions stage Skips to the stage for defining scanning selections and insertion directions Design stage Skips to the stage for designing the defined restorations Finalize stage Skips to the stage for verifying the complete restorations and for adding final touches Save stage Skips to the stage for exporting the completed restorations to input files for computer aided manufacturing facilities Table 2 1 Functions in the Main toolbar 52 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape 2 3 2 Using Mouse and Keyboard The use of mouse and keyboard in DentalDesigner for common functions is identical to the standard use windows applications typically employ for the purpose therefore the user will be left clicking to press a button or to check a checkbox The use of the right mouse button is mostly restricted to more CAD specific operations as described below Most of the steps in the modelling process require user input via mouse To perform these inputs position the mouse cursor over the area to be modif
35. T Last two days i Last week i Created WM Scanned Order Filter Checked out ud All open Information for the selected items Selected order 3D preview jer number d1000_20080828_ 1116 on date 8 28 2008 J date 8 28 2008 sie 8 28 2008 ufacturer Default Manufacturer 1 Items Selected tenal Zirkon Bridge 13 21 ManufacturerDefault1 Figure 1 1 DentalManager Order module The program is able to open the order and check its individual units see Figure 1 2 The user can click on single units of the order and get the information about each of them separately image height volume etc This option is very helpful when it comes to production as well as pricing invoicing accounting etc 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark 9 Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved pe 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 UserMamual ADOT IB 3Shape Dental Manager Orders Inbox Options Help ODCSRSR0O0OG S iii sis iss I ag Orders Order number Creation date Delivery date Client Items Material Status Height I E a d1000_20 8 28 2008 11 1 8 28 2008 Crown 26 Zirkon Scanned lay By date PY 3 muli Wh di000 20 8 28 2008 11 1 8 28 2008 Bridge
36. The user should choose the desired teeth click the Coping button and choose the Anatomical option from the menu Click the bridge button to unite teeth into the bridge See Figure 2 62 y Anatomical Eres wa p Type Circular 6mm Index Additional Figure 2 62 a defining an anatomical coping bridge in the order form b modelling an anatomical coping bridge 2 5 9 Pontic This section describes operations involved in the manipulation processes for a pontic 92 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved p 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape 2 5 9 1 Load file Load pontic model Pontic 46 Select model Pontic Anatomical pontic wh File name v Figure 2 63 The open pontic file dialog box Overview In this step we load the template pontic from the library The file name is automatically defined based on the current tooth This step simply loads the model while the next step in the modelling process transforms the pontic to the desired location and shape Process Load pontic model e Click the the first time A dialog box will appear J button on the Process toolbar automatically pressed when loading the file e DentalDesigner automatically selects a template pontic corresponding to the index of the tooth being modelled Simply click OK or press the next button in th
37. This will define the current bottom boundary of the top cap which will be set automatically for the further corrections see Figure 2 172 right o To reset to the default borders of the top cap click Clear spline e General control tools o Check Show top cap angle to get the image of the exact angular value between the implant insertion direction red arrow and the vertical top cap direction Visually top cap direction is marked with help of the green arrow that moves in accordance with modifications the top cap undergoes o Check Show top cap undercuts to check if the current design of the abutment model is accomplished with minimal undercuts Make further corrections if considered necessary 155 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved p 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape o Unfold the Collisions between models box to inspect whether it 1s possible to go on with design of the top cap regarding the current state of relations between the top cap model and the other visible models If necessary plan various strategies to come back to the design process and thereby avoid collisions o See Figure 2 174 to understand how the top cap direction helps to identify the reasons for collisions and undercuts e The Undo and Redo buttons can be used to cancel or reapply the last actions made Pressing the Undo All button deletes all the changes made l Top tap shape
38. is the outer wax up surface offset parameter which allows modelled wax ups to be offset inwards to make room for ceramics NOTE A negative offset 1s applied inwards whereas a positive outwards e The Cut offset Figure 2 119 is the distance between the margin line and the cut spline indicated by the green arrow e For a description of the following parameters Prep line offset Offset angle 1 Extension offset and the Lingual band settings please refer to section 2 5 8 Waxup offset inward s k t i k A E 1 Prep line 4 Figure 2 119 Cut offset 114 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved p 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape 2 5 13 Wax up bridge 2 5 13 1 Overview This section explains how to import and modify a wax up bridge During the modelling of wax up bridges only the inner parts of the wax up will be adapted to the die The outer part of the wax up can be modified using the Wax up Offset parameter to obtain an anatomical reduction and modelled using the Add remove tool 2 5 13 2 Order form e The first step of creating an order form for a full wax up bridge is the same as for creating a coping Select the dies corresponding to your wax up bridge and click on the Coping button right of the teeth overview map see Figure 2 120 Then scroll down the Method menu and choose Wax up single
39. qv Refresh Select Advanced Print Reset Scanned Scanned x we e Ader mmh er d1000_20080730_1050 date 7 30 2008 date 7 30 2008 Crown 11 ManufacturerDefaulti te 7 30 2008 Crown 21 ManufacturerDefault1 ufacturer Default Manufacturer 1Items Selected sshape Figure 1 15 Modify an Existing Order 25 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual E Order 3D Preview Form Order 3D preview Display items v Preperation scan Views sm C m Close Figure 1 16 Order 3D Preview 1 2 2 4 Delete Order Orders that are not locked can be deleted by selecting Delete The user will get prompted by a confirmation dialog 3 Do you want to delete the order diO00 20080721 1426 Jerry Smith Figure 1 17 Delete Order Confirmation Dialog 1 2 3 Scan Order Select an order having the status Created and select Scan or double click the order see Figurel 18 3Shape ScanItRestoration is now launched see Figure 1 19 26 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual BS 3Shape Dental Manager agi Orders Fr By date 3 Today ks 3 Last two days poe wi Last week bai wi Last two weeks M Q By status Created Order number Create date 4d1000_20 21 07 2008 14 21 07 2008 P di000 20 21 07 2008 16 i amp MEID 6
40. wibal bul Wital 4 3 mm Bridge Ellipse Golder Figure 2 155 Menu with choice of bar shape in an abutment bridge The abutments can be arranged in groups with each group having its common insertion direction New in 2008 1 This allows to model upper structures on top of customized abutments the resulting customizing abutments will be in parallel by default as long as the Top cap is not rotated during the modelling In order to define a group select the desired teeth with the cursor and choose the New Group from the Abutment drop down menu Should a second group of abutments be created it would have an incremental number See Figure 2 156 142 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual Ei Order Form Lab information Order details Scan settings Operator Order number d 1000_20080728_1540 Importance Normal Antagonist None Y Client information Double preparation F Relative position Client Contack person Create date 28 07 2008 Order details Shipping date 28 07 2008 Patient information Last name First name Ce Comments Select a new group S ue e A 4 Se Connector Type Index Additional Figure 2 156 Abutments defined in groups on the Order form 2 6 2 3 Stage 2 Directions Selections Overview In customised abutment design the
41. 0 5 i8 Scale to fit neighbours Move to manual position Adjust to gingival I ESO aN Pontic gingival offset mm 0 5 El Stretch 0 00 J Morph to Fit gingival Cut to Fit gingival sshape 7 Measure Position ene Figure 2 64 Transforming the template pontic model e Place pontic button in the Process toolbar A dialog box will appear e The mouse is used for the general transformation of the template pontic model O O The pontic is moved translated by simply dragging the model with the mouse The pontic is scaled by dragging one of the corner points marked green of the pontic bounding box When pressing SHIFT simultaneously the pontic will be scaled in all directions The pontic is rotated by clicking and dragging on one of the central points marked purple The adjacent arrows illustrate the direction of the orientation and the plane of rotation is shown with a yellow circle The shape contour of the template model can be modified morphed using a combination of keyboard and mouse Press the key m and click with the mouse on the model if you click near the boundary of the model the contour is changed when dragging and if you click inside the model the surface is moved in or out according to the direction of the dragging The morphing functionalities can also be entered via the Morph mode See below for explanation and further morphing details 94
42. 13 21 Zirkon Scanned i oday 2 8 28 2008 Crown 17 16 Zirkon Created usd Last two days 0 8 28 2008 11 3 8 28 21 C 4 Zrkoi Sc z 3 ae 0 2X 28 2008 11 28 2008 Coping 15 14 irkon canned Ux CEDAT ry MEID 61 8 28 2008 11 3 8 28 2008 Coping 14 Zirkon Scanned wy By status amp MEID 61 8 28 2008 11 3 8 28 2008 Coping 15 Zirkon Scanned Created Scanned m Modelled EED cont Handling of Y ces individual items ose x dir within the order Other filters E Checked out m All open Order number diO00 20080828 1131 1Items Selected Creation date 8 28 2008 Ip g date 8 28 2008 e date 8 28 2008 facturer Default Manufacturer Material Zirkon Coping 14 ManufacturerDefault1 Coping 15 ManufacturerDefault1 h D gt Figure 1 2 Handling of individual items within an order Orders are shown with relevant information and can be filtered out by date and status in the tree view to the left Various actions can be reached in the top toolbar or by the right click popup menu Notice that these are context dependently hence only the relevant functions are shown 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark 10 Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved gt 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape Multiple orders can be selected for further handling Use the buttons in the top toolbar or simply r
43. 170 5 12 BC MNT S B LS sate ase ie ess at ss ccm 170 3 7 2 1 Difficult Materials amp Abutment cccccccccessssseessseeseesessesesseseessseeeseseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeessssseeeeeeeeeeeeaas 172 3 7 3 Scanning A Wax Up 172 3 7 4 BABE e e anette aga E E E EE EE 173 tM Overview ECCE 173 SAE P eae E Tu m 173 Sod electis IDetalled SCR A or e a ee eee eee ee 174 3J TAA Scanning indiyid al BUTS NR 176 SM SM c DONI oe 177 SIAO Mewng Scan ASSISTING erinran oare eee 177 3 7 5 Antagonist Scan Bite Example 3 Unit Bridge cccccssscceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeess 179 SM MEME Ce sii ON lU REN 179 Dee Gros todo see PPP NETT 179 SN MEM eic BEE eR come 181 3 7 6 DoublcdA re pardo eer 1 E ene a ved are ee a ere mane nee erm ete meena rm et rere mere 183 Sud Neighbourhood Scan Relative POSIIOR eieice ioco ros tete E teo ue voceentewennciindvedidnsd Se buck ui tedE orbc epe cba S efc ope SnRebs 184 3 7 8 PRIA EN SCI NETTE mr 185 SNC MEN C AE FOUN IS EU PC 185 5 15 2 Ton Scar DU PH DE Soros seca e xc aem ic tM LEICHT eee 186 3 7 8 3 Scan Gingival Mask Preparation Scam ss00sssssessseeeseeseseeseesesessesessesssesssssssesssssseseeeceneeenens 186 Babee WR Gael Oia scam abDtrmielils es sc ee eee a seems ct see twa acces se enw sa sa tween en eee 187 3 7 9 Waran oae ec EN TTE 187 S IU Antagonis Model Sed o idtm sent cc set ce
44. 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved gt Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 User Manual 3sha pe 5 6 5 18 Importing implant systems and abutment kits using the Control Panel Importing implant systems and configuring abutment kits for use in customized abutment design are easily done using the Dental System Control Panel To configure the Dental System for customized abutment design follow the steps below 1 Open the Dental System Control Panel and browse to the Implant systems page From the main menu click Material Settings Abutments Implant Systems This will bring up the following page Dental System Control Panel Implant system Implant system C ontrols for Implant System A mana gin g ImplantSystema implant Implant System A System A systems l Abutment kits Hide inactive items qj Add dp cy 5 Move up Y Add 9 Move down x Delete Abutment kit 1 Implant models Scan abutment models Screw models implant 1 scan abutment screw 1 qi Add qi Add qi Add X Delete X velete X delete Abutment base models Abutment interface models abutment base 1 interface 1 qb add X Delete Figure 5 90 Defining implant systems and abutment kits in the Control Panel 2 Toadda new implant system implant systems press the Add button in box 1 and filling
45. 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 User Manual 5 7 3 3 3Shape Dongle Service The new 3Shape Dongle Service handles all the floating licenses as discussed in section 0 For a stand alone installation the 3Shape Dongle Service will typically be installed on the modelling PC where the dongle will also be inserted and this is automatically set up during the upgrade simply click the This PC button in 105 to reset the system to this configuration if needed 3shape If another PC on the network is used for running the Dongle Service then simply specify this PC by either writing the name of the PC or click the Browse button to find the PC on the network 5 7 3 4 Output directories In previous versions of the Dental System the order data and manufacturing output data was typically placed in the same directory but in the 3Shape Dental System two different directories are used for storing order data and manufacturing output data as seen in 105 NOTE The data directory structuring in the 3Shape Dental System provides a more clear distinction between data used internally by 3Shape applications 1 e the order directory and data used for further processing for manufacturing i e the manufacturing output directory When DentalManager is used for organizing orders the users of the 3Shape Dental System will no longer need to inspec
46. 3Shape A S All rights reserved Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 User Manual The Telescope Overlay item specific data include 3shape Data Description Wall height See Figure 2 56 and Figure 2 55 in section 0 The angle of the telescope cone measured from the telescope direction illustrated 1n Figure Telescope angle 2 101 close up from Figure 2 100 A factor determining the smoothing of the top surface according to the underlying coping Telescope smooth overlay surface This is illustrated in Figure 2 104 and Figure 2 105 the relation between the coping overlay and primary telescope surface is illustrated in Figure 2 103 Telescope default height The height of the telescope cone illustrated in Figure 2 102 close up from Figure 2 100 Telescope border margin The telescope border the top upper control points is initialized shaped as the margin line Line shaped checked otherwise in a plane i e flat orthogonal to the telescope direction POL Telescope direction Telescope angle f top control points top control points Telescope Close up Primary telescope final surface f Lower control points Figure 5 55 Final surface Figure 5 56 Telescope angle Coping overlay surface brown Primary telescope surface n Primary telescope surface grey Figure 5 58 Modelling surfaces Figure 5 59 Low smoothing Figure 5 60 High smoothing Further details and explanatio
47. 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 2 5 8 Coping This section describes operations involved in the modelling of a coping 2 9 8 1 Die overlay Overview sshape The die overlay step creates the outer surface of a coping the overlay 1s created based on the interface The parameters used for offsetting are defined by the parameters specified in the Dental System Control Panel and can be manually set in the user interface File View Help A pJ PHEIN al System Orders MANUA Die overlay Design Coes 1 Settings Type Coping overlay Zr Advanced settings Lu aes Finish ri Remove artefacts A Margin line A Die interface A Die overlay Add remove material Order Clinic Process e Click the s wall thickness 0 60 mm e L Wall height 1 00 mm amp 2 4 Margin line offset 0 250 mm 6501 e Extension offset 0 200 mm 6 Lingual band e s Apply L E o Start angle 1208 eee 0 Endang 20 8j Offset 109 inm Bridge 24 26 Default Clinic Figure 2 54 The die overlay step D of E fe m E button on the Process toolbar A dialog box will appear e Selecting an element in the Type drop down box chooses the settings used for creating the outside of the coping 89 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shap
48. 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved h p Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 User Manual 3snape 5 6 5 1 Combined setting system When entering one of the construction element item groups links to other item groups might be displayed on the data interface as on the Primary Telescope item data interface on 35 This generally means that the data of one item in each of the item groups linked to here a Cement Space Telescope Overlay and Optional Component item is associated with the item displayed EJ Dental System Control Panel Primary telescope Id Save o Back Navigation Home Material Settings Primary telescope Edit Primary telescope Telescope l Change ID Marre Primary telescope crown zr esta Color A3 Primary telescope crown Ti ID Cement spaces Telescope overlays E Optional components wp add d Cony x Delete Ej Menge np 26 Move down Recycle bin ug ose Ej estore all hems d Emni the Recyde Bln Details Total 2 items Figure 5 35 Item data interface with links to other item groups This also means that the data of the linked items can also be associated with other items For instance the data in the Cement Space item associated with the Primary Telescope item could also be associated with other Primary Telescope items as well as other Coping and Wax up items since all three const
49. Bridge 24 26 Browse for Folder Select Folder to 7 Orientate E My Documents S 1 My Computer See DiskOne C Order Bridge 24 26 5 3shape Clinic Default Clinic H 3brdiooo 20060621 1159 12 ff e 3shaders 20070529 1031 P C017 di 00 20061109 Andrea ModelJobID_ 0F767B0B 3DB S 1109 d1000 20061018 Andrea E S 1934 d2201 20060629 GM Eic 3 o DPS 019282 d 1nad EEE pac lt Ii i gt c x 5l Position C Measure 3 S h a p e gt Uo Rotation angle C Area Figure 2 33 Saving a 3D computer model of the dental restoration 2 5 Modelling operations This chapter offers a detailed description of the operations involved in the various modelling processes Some operations are used exclusively in the modelling of a specific item while others are common to multiple items In section 2 5 1 all the modelling operations are listed with references to the associated operation description and item while sections 2 5 2 2 5 12 present the individual operations 2 5 1 Overview A list of modelling operations available in DentalDesigner is given in Figure 2 34 Button Operation Used for item Remove artefacts remove scan artefacts Coping Telescope Wax up fi Hemove artefacts Margin line define the margin line Coping Telescope Wax up 15 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Ma
50. CTRL UP or SHIFT UP to move the point even faster use the DOWN key in a similar way Press the ENTER key on the keyboard to move to the next die in the job If this is the last die then the optimisation is automatically started o Use the mouse to change the position of the points Press the Mouse button to select the mouse editing mode as shown in Figure 2 23 This will clear the existing points which is recommended if the initial points are placed far away from the margin line Place a point on the die by pressing the left mouse button The die will rotate so that the next point can be placed by pressing the left mouse button once again spline appears between the points during the placement of the eight points and after the eighth point is placed the spline is automatically closed 66 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved gt 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 UserManal CT Press the ENTER key on the keyboard to move to the next die in the job the keyboard editing method will be chosen per default for the next die If this 1s the last die then the optimisation is automatically started o Use the components on the form to change the position of the points Press the Move line arrows to change between points Press the Move point arrows to move the point up and down Press the Select model arrows to switch between models individual dies LI
51. Clear the spline button in the dialog box to clear the existing points and define the optimal selection of points representing the gingival spline once again HINT If a point needs to be removed right click the point and the spline will be automatically restored at the place of the deleted point Setting the gingival spline offset by simply filling in the appropriate numerical value for the offset in mm in dialog box The value of the gingival spline offset defines the distance between the gingival spline a property of the abutment model and the corresponding spline on the gingiva a property of the scan Apply a negative offset to move it sub gingival and a positive offset to move it super gingival To edit the vertical dimensions of the emergence profile unfold the additional mode of the dialog box Edit exit profile shape This will automatically provide a digital image of the cross section of the model and rotate its profile to display the first profile spline ready for editing as shown in Figure 2 164 O To edit individual emergence profile splines use the mouse to change the position of the points Modify the position of the blue points using the left mouse button Click Next or Previous button on the dialog box or press the ENTER key on the keyboard to move to the next spline in the job Alternatively use left and right arrow keys on the keyboard to move between the splines HINT If you are not sat
52. Figure 2 41 The red pencil effect Figure 2 42 The red pencil effect Figure 2 43 The red pencil effect with 0 angle and no smoothing with 5 angle and no smoothing with 5 angle and smoothing 81 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual E DentalDesigner WPC81 GShape Dental System OrdersiMANUAL_1___20070614_1024 MANUAL_1___20070614_1024 xml Jeg File View Help 6 x 389 G12 20 Model visibility x Design D sang h SC i Margin line eg F preoer E HT i y CI Antagonist E sme JC a Show undercut f Show points B Ss T Advanced gt ew Point distance ange go Odeo BM o A WR o CEU M93 X aris 2 Smoothing e Show angle graphics A Pr Coping 24 Frisch TEIL Remove artefacts amp I Margin line E A Die interFace oe A Die overlay Addjremove material s a Aug ah 26 T t Clini inic efault Clinic 3S h a p e b Ue Figure 2 44 Defining the margin direction results in a better match of the actual die 2 5 4 Spline Manipulation Splines can be drawn automatically and corrected if needed later or they can be drawn manually with the cursor using the Fast Edit feature The images below show examples of manipulation with the Margin Line Clicking the Step button opens up 2D Margin Line preview window to confirm the correct intersection of the spline with the section of the part The
53. Manual 3shape It is important to note that the green points only reflect an estimate of the margin line hence they do not need to be placed exactly on the margin line A detailed definition of this line is performed in stage 3 of the modelling process Te Athen re ee m a irme P rias eid eres Fui RU dil 1 GREY MF en mrs A m 4 B m E A m x d ae iu sk Seay Bisse Directions timi Direccions ET m B EIE H Qe g ara li tago amp 47 uas pa u B art na PP Qu Li f k 5230 eegs a ie 1 ub y R Mp oru t x ashape gt i ashape Figure 2 25 Insertion direction displayed with blue Figure 2 26 Insertion direction and undercut arrows and simple undercut visualization visualization with depth information 2 4 4 Stage 3 Design Overview The Design part is the core of DentalDesigner here individual restorations e g a stand alone coping or units from more complex restorations are modelled individually This stage is probably the most intense in term of time and expertise thus a deep understanding of the design process and the concepts behind it will greatly help the user perform best in DentalDesigner At this stage a deeper and more organic view of the DentalDesigner workflow can be very useful The user read about the workflow characteristics already but until this point the workflow itself has been mainly linear working with DentalDesigner until this point has been clo
54. Mount and insert pontic If a pontic library has been selected on the form shown in Figure 4 5 the user will be prompted to mount and insert the pontic into the scanner as soon as OK 1s clicked on The needle fixture shown in Figure 4 6 is used to fix the pontic during scanning The pontic is fixed by pricking one side of it with the needle The pontic should be painted in white with material preferably approved by 3Shape in order to ensure high scanning quality This becomes more important if the pontic has a dark colour or its surface appears shiny The pontic fixture 1s placed on the interface plate in the scanner so that the top of the pontic points to the left and the front faces outside as shown in Figure 4 6 Appropriate orientation of the pontic in the scanner will facilitate the following operations Scanning will start when the button Next 1s pushed 195 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved p 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape ae Insert pontic 17 Pil Ehe poc ir Ifa pent or Hur interface plabe args align rt peoperrhs acer ring 1n tha pietues Dakew Toewing bim gulide of Ihe scanner Mri o a Tc o Cy e Tv e e T c amp amp a L Figure 4 6 Mount a pontic insert it into the scanner and be ready to scan 4 4 1 2 Supplementary scan optional When the first scan is finished it will be shown on the screen Usually the user simply needs to click on Next
55. PORTA ORD e aa E A A A E 8 1 2 GETTING STARTED WITH DENTALMANAGER aiissccasestauavszancaassdsunainatanscansussaaiueaavanandedaaedusheunacaauataaansnansecacdsssetebanceaseusss 9 II Dental Tanas cr sDODCHt Re S ooa eect cutee tbe eet UD eeu a UE PME UD ected 11 1 22 IER TR BIA RN EC 13 BUR MEE e RURSUS 14 EAS MER BD Urn e A Oi NN TT m m 15 1223 F960 BRC atn BXISEBB O16 cs eee ene ena oet Pe uude ee arg ater LR aa 29 EL D O a E E A E E AA A 26 1 2 3 EEO i E E AAI AEA Sate oe A AAE ENANA S E A A E 26 beak Taon e n r A E E E E E eee eee 28 1 2 4 MUl Ve B v6 AE A A EE E A A OE E E E A AET A cll Sep nt E E deel E tiem ok Beste 29 1 2 3 Manni ei 0 ee r a e e e a e 31 1 2 6 EE NONE EEIEIIE EEI ON IOE E I O IA A O E 33 1 2 7 eS AURIS NNI EE RR A E AEI AN E N EA A A AE 33 Eo TA O ETE 34 We AGONY NEE E E AA A E AO EA EEA E 35 1 2 7 3 Select Orders with Common Values iicsccsiccoscsccesavonionsonoasdueiaeslendeadasdnbiabotandenoaenacauasseanabsanisoadaveacdnantecostaveselius 36 1 2 7 4 Creating output for local production using generic machines the Generate CAM Output function 37 7 MEM gt 4 019 G18 SITE T RR 38 Eoo ai X OTN CMG Tm 40 IV TP E es RN 4 INE NRCS NRSRNENRRRU 4 1 2 8 lm S CB SML REO DON 42 IDA MEE EIC o n RR 43 Do TR LII EN 44 1 3 listo MODUL cP 44 1 4 PRINTING AND READING LABELS
56. Save the current changes 201 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved p 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape When navigating in the Control Panel the Navigation toolbar not shown Navigation Home Material Settings in Figure 5 1 shows the current level and allows easy entry to a higher level incl the main screen as in Figure 5 1 5 3 System Settings When the System Settings configuration screen 1s accessed the main information sources of the application can be setup Figure 5 2 shows the screen that the user will be faced with more settings are available when scrolled down Dental System Control Panel System Settings H Save E Back Navigation Home Tasks System Settings Set Dentalbesigner path Set ScanlkRestoration path DentalDesigner A Set ScanItLibrary path y Set DentalManager path DentalDesigner is currently defined as Y Set SD Viewer path WUPCOS SShape Dental System Dentalbesigner y Browse For 35hape Dongle Service computer Wl Use auta save during modelling y Set Order directory path p Use AddRemnove Intelligent component Details DentalDesigner SranltRestaratian J Installed ScanltRestoration is currently defined as ScanitRestoration 4 rai WUPRCOS SShape Dental System ScanltRestoration SranlItLibrary Jf Installed ScanItLibrarw DentalManager i Installed ScanlIELibrarv is currently defined as 3D Viewer URCOS Shape Dental Syst
57. SiteID of the milling center NOTE Also you need to pay special interest to the FTP settings of the central milling center These settings define your access to the FTP server at the central milling center and the FTP IP address user password and directory must specify an FTP account where you have full read write possibilities at the FTP server This can be tested by pressing the Test connection button Please see section 0 for possible error messages Please note that some or all of these site settings may be provided to you by your software provider Also for encrypted systems some of the site settings can not be changed by you please contact your software provider if you have questions regarding this 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark 271 Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved gt Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 User Manual 3sha pe 5 7 3 7 Manufacturing processes The manufacturing processes specifies which production possibilities e g milling machines are available for a given manufacturer the manufacturers available in the list are the ones having Has CAM checked Also the materials available for the given manufacturing process can be specified The manufacturing settings are used in the Order Form With the settings specified in 111 if you choose Zirkon and manufacturer Central milling center then yo
58. above In general all data with the exception of the ID and Name is copied to the new element but there can be exceptions These will be explained under the specific items Deletes the currently selected item This does not really delete the item immediately the item is instead deactivated and placed in the Recycle bin where it can be finally deleted or restored back to the item list The Recycle bin is administrated through the Recycle bin panel middle left When deleting item Not named from Figure 5 23 the Recycle bin panel Operations are enabled and the item appears on the Recycle bin item list as in Figure 5 24 Delete Selected items in the Recycle bin item list can be restored finally deleted individually and all list items can be collectively restored finally deleted NOTE 1 Some items cannot be deleted the Delete operation will never be enabled However the name and data for these items can be changed NOTE 2 Restored items are still deactivated remember to update the Active status see further explanation below Move up Moves the currently selected item one place up in the list Move down Moves the currently selected item one place down in the list Selection of ID Selection of ID Please select a valid unique ID for the new entry ID IDOperatar3 Lok Figure 5 22 ID dialog when adding a new item 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K D
59. and continue In order to improve the coverage the user has the option of making a supplementary scan by clicking on the button Supplementary scan as shown in Figure 4 7 It should be noted that a supplementary scan will not compensate for a poor scan caused by e g the improperly mounted pontic or inadequate surface coating B eanl anti Fe Hap Fic Hel e ee Scanning finished Insert pontic 43 cn larfe ln and slg pow z gery amp A aisi To 3 f t gt S x d e c tb D e G b e amp Sa amp 3 Roast e n Rait Facial surface Figure 4 7 Optionally a supplementary scan can be made after the first scan When the supplementary scan is finished the user needs to align the two scans so that the program can combine them into one final scan As show in Figure 4 8 select two corresponding points on the two scans one point on each scan and then click on Apply To finish this option click on OK 196 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved gt 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape Combining two pontic scans ery bebe gt amp amp ae e E e e i e x c ee iind been comedponckny pronis fore ori pach rude Figure 4 8 Align the first and the supplementary scan so that the two scans can be combined into one final scan 4 4 1 3 Edit scan When scanning is finished or if the supplementary scan has been selected the two scans have been combined the
60. be prompted to insert the arch with scan abutments as shown in the figure below In order to achieve accurate alignment for those scan abutments the marks on an abutment should not be occluded by the neighbouring teeth when it is inserted into the model Preferably no gingival mask should be mounted now in order to enhance visibility of the scan abutments Insert arch with abutments G9 eegc o0 See eee d eoo eoo Figure 3 30 Instruction for the first scan if abutments have been defined in the dental order Once Next is selected a rough selection scan will begin On completion of this quick scan the area of scan abutments should be selected one by one for detailed scanning When one abutment has been selected and Continue is clicked on the user will be prompted to select the next abutment see figure below Detailed scanning will start when selection is finished for all abutments In the following step this detailed scan will be used to align the CAD model of each abutment to the corresponding scan Selection tools m a es a da K Abutment 12 select detailed scan area To skip selection for this abutment just dick on Abutment 22 select detailed scan area To skip selection for this abutment just dick on Continue Figure 3 31 Selecting the first LEFT and the second RIGHT abutment for detailed scanning 185 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved p 3Shape Den
61. box in the left upper corner of the modelling window to revert the changes made to the spline completely Figure 2 176 Manual modification of the bar shape The Settings section in the main dialog box controls the shape of the whole bar O The user is given the chance to modify the shape of the bar in real time which was previously specified in the Order Form at the beginning of the order processing Among the default options available choose rectangle ellipse or dolder This will modify the shape of the whole bar accordingly NOTE The changes applied to the model in Edit bar are saved in real time and none of them will be cancelled if the value for one or more different settings is post edited NOTE Your own fully customized model of the bar profile can be created using the ControlPanel from where it is transferred to the list of the shapes available for the bar design in AbutmentDesigner V Define the Distance to spline and Distance to gingiva in the dialog box in mm Define the Proximal gap radius in mm considering the radius of the space generated next to the abutment The Active cross section profile part of the dialog box controls the shape of an individual section of the bar that is activated by selecting the corresponding control point O O Select a cross section profile as shown in Figure 2 176 marked yellow Define the appropriate Distance to spline and the Width
62. checkmark else you will get one of these error message see It is necessary to have both read write access to the FTP directory since track and trace information is uploaded and downloaded In case of other problems with the inbox a error log file C Program Files 3Shape DentalManager DentalManager exe log is created which might provide indication of the error source Error message Potential cause of error Dental System Control Panel EW During testing FTP connection following errors occured 2 Wrong FTP IP address Cannot connect ta ftp server O Wrong FTP user name o Wrong FTP password 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark 275 Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 User Manual Dental System Control Panel E During testing FTP connection following errors occured Mo write access for specified folder Wo read access for specified folder sshape FTP directory does not exist on FTP server If no ftp directory 1s specified different ftp servers can require specification of either P or empty The user has no read write access to the FTP directory A firewall blocking the communication on the FTP Similar error messages may be shown if only read write access is allowed for the sender Table 5 1 Test ftp connection error message for se
63. does not only offer convenient feature settings but also settings that are necessary to customize in order to get a fully satisfying performance from the 3Shape Dental System applications 5 2 Application interface The Dental System Control Panel is started by double clicking on the appropriate icon shown right A user friendly interface screen will then be displayed showing all the main features of the application Each of the options can be selected with one left click of the mouse If there are any applications in the Details tab that have a red cross beside them instead of a green check mark this means that the application 1s not correctly recognised similarly with the order and output directories P Dental System Cont m mx Pick a category ee System Settings lt 9 Material Settings e DentalManager System Settings Administrative Settings E Administrative Settings Details DentalManager Material Settings DentalDesigner Installed ScanitRestoration J Installed DentalManager Main task window ff Installed 3D Viewer Details tab 4 Installed Dongle License Server Jf Installed Order directory af Installed Output Directory J Directory set Figure 5 1 Category Selection The Tasks tab on the left in Figure 5 1 will display a short summary of the details that are being displayed in the Main task window The Tool bar in Figure 5 1 has the following the options A Save
64. groups NOTE When adding a new coping primary telescope or wax up item a Material ID can be specified along with the item ID When the item is created it will automatically be associated with items that are specified for that material When non yet exist a default will be created When more than one exist the first on the list will be chosen 5 6 5 2 Cement spaces The Cement Space items contain data for specifying the inner surface of a coping primary telescope or wax up construction element The Cement Space item data interface is illustrated on 39 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark 233 Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved P Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 User Manual APO Edit Cement space ID Cementspacel Change ID Marne Cementspace zr Material Remove undercuts Cement gap 0 025 inre Extra cement gap 0 040 mm 0 Distance to preparation line oo mm Smooth distance ag m i Y Figure 5 39 Cement Space item data interface Other than the Material ID the Cement Space item specific data includes Data Description Renove indecis If checked undercuts will be removed when creating the cement space The effect on the cement space when removing undercuts is illustrated in Figure 2 46 and Figure 2 47 Cement gap See Figure 2 49 c
65. is completed using default values for all modelling parameters Coping lt 6 Fl Finish ff Remove artefacts Completed oa ba NM n Margin line n Die overlay Add remaove maternal Figure 2 3 Example of Process toolbar for a coping HINT Depending on user s techniques and modelling habits it can be useful in some cases to push the button Add Remove and jump to a completed job in order to rework it manually with the add remove wax knife tool 57 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape 2 3 5 View toolbar 2 3 5 1 Overview In the paragraph 2 3 the Visualization toolbar is explained the View toolbar provides similar functionalities for 2D visualization The 2D views are meant to be useful in situations where a section view is crucial to correctly visualize the modelling as for instance while setting the margin line in order to check for undercuts 2 3 5 2 Composition The View toolbar consists of two 2D windows and of several adjustment tools these tools are used to modify the section shown in the left window only The right window is used exclusively for some steps of modelling and DentalDesigner controls the section to make it visible as it happens for instance in the margin line definition step 2 3 5 3 Functioning Panning and Zooming the user can right click or use the mouse wheel in both 2D windows to pan and zoom respectively just
66. lag File About E oe 1000 20 8 28 2008 11 1 8 28 2008 H Crown 2 WO dio00 20 8 28 2008 ii i 8 28 2008 Zirkon ul Today Click on Help to get TE Loi bens di000 20 8 28 2008 11 1 8 28 2008 the drop down menu Zirkon 8 dioo0 20 8 28 2008 11 3 8 28 2008 omr Ts m Zirkon o9 Last week waj Last two weeks Cw By status ux Created a Scanned ANE Modeled E Sent w Closed Bi F ur Figure 1 39 Help Menu If you click on Options the menu with the Label Printer Settings and Add ons and Modules will appear for more information see Figure 1 52 and Figure 1 56 42 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved a gt 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 UserManual 9hape 1 2 8 1 License Information The status of the license server can be obtained by clicking on License Information in the help menu The default browser is opened showing different information regarding the dongle an example is shown in Figure 1 40 Additionally it is possible to check the dongle for updates or show the server log file by clicking on the buttons positioned at the bottom e 3Shape License Server Windows Internet Explorer FAX 7 el http thispc 27027 Iv 3X e Sear Pr File Edit View Favorites Tools Help ww shape License Server fen Home J si f Print 3Shape License Server version 1 0 6 0 Dongle number 92361100 DentalDesig
67. like in the 3D view Slice rotation angle and Slice position allow the user to define the section to be shown visually in the left 2D window Some practice is suggested for the user to get confident with such parameters Measure tool is a simple yet effective 2D measurement tool When the box is checked the user can measure distance between points inside the left 2D window to define the first point left click on the border of the section inside the left 2D window Left click again on the section border to define the second point at this time a line will appear between the two points along with the distance value indicated Important the user can freely drag and move the points on the section surface whereby the distance value will be updated automatically even after modifying the section parameters done by modifying the Slice rotation angle and the Slice position parameters Area tool this tool is meant for area measurements within 2D windows When the Area checkbox is checked the measurement is activated simply by moving the mouse over the area to be measured the area will then turn yellow and the surface volume measured in mm will appear Important the area measurement tool will only work when a closed surface is selected as it would make no sense measuring a surface with no defined boundaries For the tool to work smoothly we suggest to use it together with the Measure tool in this case the Area tool will determine the li
68. on margin Figure 2 20 Wrong placement of selection on gingiva lines and gingiva e If the control points are place incorrectly the user can rearrange them This is the first time the user meets control points as the user will progress in learning how to operate DentalDesigner control points behaviour will become clear At this moment it should be clear that a blue control point can always be moved using the mouse input In order to move a control point the user has to select it this 1s done by clicking on it and holding the left mouse button down When selected the control point turns yellow only while it is yellow the control point may be moved around by dragging the mouse Releasing the left mouse button will cause the control point to become deselected and to return to its normal blue colour e The user can also delete all the control points placed by pushing the Clear button on the Selection form see Figure 2 19 e If the selections defined in ScanItRestoration are incorrect these can be cancelled by checking the Ignore scanning selections see Figure 2 19 2 4 3 2 Define telescope primary directions Overview The telescope primary direction is only active when user is modelling a telescope The primary insertion direction is the direction the prosthesis or the restoration will be inserted on top of the telescope s This means that in case there is more than one telescope there will be only one insertion direction and i
69. or another Silhouette connector item up as the first element in the Connector item list as shown in 84 in order to make it the default choice in the Order Form LJ Save Navigation Home Material Settings Edit Connector Silhouette Petar BIO ID Circular Smm Elliptical amp mm Elliptical rnm Mane Marne Active Connector shape type Facial distance Palatal liricuial cist Hide inactive items Oecclusal distance deos 4 Copy Counter occlusal dist D Center stretch Center scale Center shift up Recycle bin Center shift back wp No bem Number af points nu Resknie all Eems gl Empty Mie Recvrele Bln Area Details Total 6 items Active 6 items Link Typeconnectors Change ID Silhouette uo I E m to ct Im x Cl C rJ mal T OH H cM oN gN Eal Emi E ao Ko KI E m ri e e alr sp Sm hal 9 00 Figure 5 112 Recommended to move the Silhouette connector item up as default first item in the list 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com 273 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved ne gt Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 User Manual 3sha pe 5 7 3 9 Margin line After updating the material settings as part of the Upgrade the specified settings for the Margin line may have been changed to the settings shown below NOTE Please verify
70. overview map see Figurel 8 It is possible to select more than one tooth at a time Simply click on several teeth or use the standard SHIFT left click to select a row of teeth A multiple selection allows bridges to be applied see Figure 1 9 Next to every restoration key you will find menus with different options as among others the type of restoration and material see Figure 1 7 Figure 1 10 Figure 1 11 and Figure 1 12 The users are able to specify the color of the material in the order that should be used to produce the restoration New in 2008 1 This option is available for all of our restorations crowns pontics copings telescopes and abutments The colors are represented in the form of a special scale Al A2 A3 B1 B2 B3 etc each letter representing a shade of color To define this in the order form the user should choose the desired restoration click the button to the right and select the desired color See Figure 1 7 16 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved h ps 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual ssnape f Order Form Lab information Order settings Scan settings Operator Andrea Steven Order number dio00 20080901 1172 Object hype Model Importance Normal w Antagonist Client information Double preparation i PEE Neighborhood scan O ient Contact person Create date af 1 2008 Shipping date of ijz n8 Patient information Last name Smith z 4 Manufacturing process
71. primary telescope 2 5 11 1 Primary telescope overlay Overview In this step the primary telescope overlay is created The telescope is created on the output from the die interface operation see section 2 5 5 DentalDesigner provides a default position angle and height of the telescope The user can subsequently change these settings manually File View Help Er ix 389 Diago 8 Telescope Crown Model visibility Desi gn EG Scans m evang v Preperation Ne We Telescope overlay v p A a errs Base coping settings e Min wall thickness 0 55 fl mm amp rc LO ww e Wall height 1 00 ie mm B ec i TETRAN cem IY m Margin line offset 0 25 ie mm o e S e ty Offset angle 1 65 01 ie ETT Pd e e Extension offset 0 20 mm amp Lingual band a e Apply LIN t d oe eo Start angle _ 120 e A End angle 240 Offset 1 00 Senn pt Telescope R Primary crown settings prima xe Ange j 2 00 e S Remove artefacts O v AS Telescope spline control E A Margin line A nl Min height 3 00 mm E i R Die interface Prep line shape Point distance 1 00 mm Initialize R Primary telescope overlay jd Optional components Add remoyve material Figure 2 95 Initial primary telescope Process Primary telescope overlay e Click thet button in the Process toolbar A dialog box
72. production The drill compensation can be applied if a milling machine is employed for manufacturing 03 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual A Cement Space i aes Settings A 7 Name Cementspace Zr v Remove undercuts Mg Drill compensation M 7A SARF s Difference map a d SY e Coloring 3 e tee o Thickness e e Undercut removal c t5 Drill compensation oO amp Depth value S s Coe eo 7 Advanced settings A Cement gap 0 025 i mm Extra cement gap 9 040 i mm Dist to margin line 1 00 mm Coping 24 C Frish Smooth dist 0 20 mm il radi 0 60 amp S Remove artefacts wih 060 Sj mm Drill Comp Offset 1 50 ie mm A Margin line R Die interface Bl A Die overlay Addjremove material Order Bridge 24 26 ae um TA Clinic 3 S h a p e P Save modelling tree Process e Click the J button on the Process toolbar A dialog box will now appear zi JS h Ee Aan amp ce to e Selecting an element in the Name drop down box chooses the settings used for creating the interface Each element in the drop down box corresponds to a material specified in the ControlIPanel thus users can build up a list of preferred settings using this application e Undercut areas are often compensated for in order to m
73. rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual Figure 2 106 Smooth top surface Primary ravi settings age go t Seth J Ln Basn coping settings fa Frimary crown settings Figure 2 110 Adjust point distance Prep kahig 7 amp eTlngs TH TH Telescope overiay wi mI ieena cpi ae ome nem Pome distance 100 E mm Le e i m Settings GA Tga Telescope overiry aj Base coping retings ta Primary crown settings age j 2 00 Smocth J im Telescop spina canol Met fee Prep lw ataga 9 Pont dutana 105 nn Ive Iei nt Figure 2 111 Apply sshape Figure 2 109 Adjust minimum height 110 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 2 5 11 2 Optional components Overview asshape This step follows the creation of a primary telescope It offers the option to attach a model component on the side of the telescope The type of component and positioning are optional File View Help tao oilis Attach dental components Design Settings A Min dist to interface 1B mm Adjust angle J Next e e S e gt e m Es id e EE o J o ncc S e e e amp S 22 es ET Tel YE Telescope Finish Remove artefacts A Margin line R Die interface R Primary telescope overlay R Optional components 0 ma
74. scanning The front of the teeth should always be used here Once the appropriate number of dies has been selected the first die can be scanned 3 7 4 4 Scanning Individual Dies Although there is now a more accurate scan of the bridge area the detail level can now be greatly improved by scanning the surrounding individual dies For this example there are two surrounding dies that we wish to scan 176 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved p 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape Figure 3 18 A Typical Die Figure 3 19 Ideal Fixing of Die The first tooth die is placed into the scanning fixture as shown in Figure 3 18 and then both are placed into the scanner The doors can then be shut and the Scan button on the application can be clicked on Once the first die is scanned the following dies should be scanned in correct order This order was defined when selecting the dies for further scanning in the previous dialogue The same process for scanning the first die is used for the remaining dies and then the complete model should be saved It is not necessary to scan the bridge gap area This should have been labelled previously as a pontic 3 4 5 Preparation of Die For the preparation of the die it is generally recommended that sharp edges are avoided This is also true for most CAD based systems In particular the ground enhancement of the margin preparation line should not be allowed to form very sh
75. screen L1 L File View Help ox pit Directions 1 Main toolbar j d Du leg ef 5 Visualization fr i i TY e 2 Overview toolbar toolbar e 2 e e P G n A amp amp Modelling window a e T A E lE E i 3 Process toolbar Selections E4 Insertion direction 4 View toolbar Order Bridge 17 27 Clinic Default Clinic 2D slice view C J F di Position _ Measure 3S h a D e gt E Rotation angle Area 3 Figure 2 1 The DentalDesigner user interface A detailed description of these toolbars is provided in the following sections 51 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved T S 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape 2 3 1 Main toolbar The Main toolbar contains some of the main functions that will be relevant while performing all the operations of in the modelling process It consists of two parts the left part contains buttons to perform common file and order related operations such as creating loading and saving modelling sessions The right part has to do with operations related to the modelling itself The function of the buttons contained in the right part of the Main toolbar is primarily technical and this becomes clear as soon as the user gets acquainted with the modelling functions and the workflow system of DentalDesigner Thus the buttons description given in Table 2 1 1s meant as a pure reference only Item Operation New modelling
76. settings Lingual band offset Figure 2 58 Overlay with lingual band Figure 2 59 Lingual band offset 90 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual File View Help z mx 289 ot 220 i 28 Die overlay Model visibility Desi gn l Scans Settings 1 Preperation Next Type CopingoverlayZr v I Antagonist Advanced settings A gers amp re Wall thickness 0 60 ie mm le l wall height 1 00 mm M T R d e Margin line offset 0 250 amp mm Sy e ee ic A B 3 Offset angle 1 65 01 Be e Extension offset 0 200 E mm y i S Lingual band 1 g Appl amp 2 2S A e a Start angle 120 pm TORF End angle 210 e I Offset 1 00 S mm A t conna 24 C Finish S Remove artefacts A Margin line R Die interface A Die overlay Add remove material Lingual band x Figure 2 61 Lingual band angles overlay from below Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved b 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape 2 5 8 2 Anatomical copings anatomical coping bridges Along with using the standard copings 3shape offers the user the anatomical coping libraries Unlike standard copings anatomical copings repeat the shape of the tooth and look more natural The anatomical copings can be used for single teeth as well as for bridges New in 2008 1
77. shifting e Delimiting items e Press OK to finish the connector 103 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual Figure 2 82 Red arrow marking the area causing Figure 2 83 The red arrow shown in Edit mode problems for the connector Figure 2 84 Prior to changing the intersection Figure 2 85 The shape and area are changed plane following the edited intersection plane Connector control spline Connector control spline Figure 2 86 Circular shaped connector Figure 2 87 Elliptic shaped connector 104 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved p 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape Connector Area slice Connector scaling mid up Connector scaling mid down Figure 2 88 Connector Figure 2 89 Low scale factor Connector stretching Figure 2 91 Low stretch factor Figure 2 92 Neutral stretch factor Figure 2 93 High stretch factor NOTE The OK button finishes the connector DentalDesigner automatically switches to the next element in the modelling job that is not yet finished You can return to the connector at any time either by clicking on the connector in the Overview toolbar or by clicking on the actual model in the modelling window 2 5 10 4 Validation Validation is the visualization function of the DentalDesigner which evaluates the restoration during the modelling process according to the s
78. ta restore the installation later The current date and time is automatically added to your your backup The backup may take several minutes Tf Upgrading using cdrom please don t remove the cdrom during the backup Backup description 2007 12 18 01 18 Folder c 3shape backup Skip backup not recommended d Choose folder Figure 5 100 It is recommended to create a backup during the upgrade 5 7 1 3 DentalManager and 3Shape Dongle Service installation The 3Shape Dental System comes with the DentalManager application DentalManager handles the orders through the production processes and controls the ScanItRestoration and DentalDesigner applications Also a new 3Shape Dongle Service is installed 5 7 1 4 DentalManager and Microsoft SQL server installation As part of the DentalManager installation a Microsoft SQL server is installed as database NOTE The installation of the Microsoft SQL server takes some time and it is important that the installation is not cancelled at any time during this installation 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark 263 Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 User Manual 3Shape Dental System Upgrade Dental System Upgrade Q Back a Home Current applications POSCUT CAAP nr E 3Shape DentalM anager requires that the following requir
79. tadis 5 Moye nn 0 600 FARNI n Move down Materials Manufacturers y zirkon Default Manufacturer Recycle bin i Titan Kiev map ho Fame C My Lab Central manufacturing ES Pesto all ibems ea Emnhy the Recyvele Bln Details Total 2 items Figure 5 34 Manufacturing process item data interface 5 6 4 4 Colors The color of restoration material can be defined in DSCP DSCP gt Material Settings gt Colors The user can edit and add colors to the provided list of colors A1 D4 5 6 5 Construction elements The basic construction elements consist of Copings Primary telescopes Wax ups Crowns Pontics Connectors Abutments available as add on module and Bars The Wax ups are used for single wax ups as well as for Wax up bridges Also the common item Margin line is used in several of the elements 99 ec While Pontic and Connector items contain individual data Coping Primary telescope and Wax up items share some of the associated data they share link to other item groups These item groups include Cement Space items Optional Component items only for primary telescopes for this release and a variety of Overlay items Before the individual item groups are described this linking or combined setting system 1s described in general 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark 230 Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax
80. that these settings corresponds to your preferred settings or else change them back to your preferred settings PY Dental System Control Panel Margin line PER L4 Save Navigation Home Material Settings Margin line Edit Margin line Margin line Marne Margiti line Point distance 0 40 mim Angle Maintain angle Smoothing Figure 5 113 Inspect the Margin line settings 5 7 4 Send and receive orders Inbox add on module The DentalManager Inbox add on module enables transfer of orders over the internet between manufactures and their customers The Inbox is therefore a very important component of the 3Shape Dental System for central manufacturing centres planning to receive orders from customers Please note the license terms in the forewords to this manual regarding the DentalManager Inbox add on module The Inbox add on module in DentalManager requires a standard FTP server Please notice that the FTP server is mandatory if you plan to send or receive orders An FTP server is an internet site where files and be uploaded and downloaded FTP server space can be rented typically from e g local internet providers or www hotels Alternatively it is also possible to setup an ftp locally on a standard PC please contact your local IT support for questions 5 7 4 1 Receiver Inbox add on module required When the FTP server is up running the Inbox can be configured within the Control Panel please see 114 By pressing the
81. the fixture are not polluted by the paint The wax up bridge should be mounted so that the important part e g the front side of the teeth is well visible for the cameras and laser in order to obtain optimal scanning coverage Typically invisible 187 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved p 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape surfaces face downwards The wax up bridge should not be placed too high on the fixture Preferably not higher than the second highest string and it should be secured so that it will not move during scanning When the fixture is inserted into the scanner the strings on the fixture should be approximately parallel to the front wall of the scanner as shown in the figure below uti ER Figure 3 36 Mount wax up bridge Once the wax up bridge has been scanned it will be displayed on the screen and the areas lacking scanning points will be highlighted as shown below Figure 3 37 Wax up bridge scan with areas lacking scanning points highlighted If a scan significantly lakes scanning points in interesting areas the scanning quality can be improved by making a supplementary scan in the next step The final scan will be obtained by combining the two scans In this case the user should answer Yes in the dialogue shown below and vertically flip the wax up bridge on the fixture before inserting it again into the scanner Confirm 2 Make a suppleme
82. the owner has the material named Zirkon specified and that there exists only one Telescope Overlay item specified for Zirkon Checked item list All items that can be entered through another item have a check box in front of each name in the interface item list Only one item 1s checked the item associated with the current owner When entering the Overlay items link on 36 we get to the Overlay items on 37 Two Overlay items exists that are specified for the material Zirkon Both are displayed and optional and the item named Overlay telescope Zr is chosen checked 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark 232 Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved gt Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 User Manual 3sha pe Edit Overlay ID Cyerlay1 Name Basic overlay Zr Material Wall thickness Preparation line offset Offset angle Extension offset Apply lingual band Lingual band start angle Lingual band end angle Lingual band offset Figure 5 37 The item Overlay telescope Zr2 is chosen by the owner item In 38 is an illustration of the construction element item groups and their internal relations Primary Copi W Cement Coping Waxup Telescope Optional spaces overlays overlays overlays components A Overlays Figure 5 38 Internal relations between the construction item
83. the various scans are performed To scan an object perform the following steps 1 Startup a Switch on the 3Shape 3D scanner b Switch on the ScanServer PC the PC connected to the scanner c Start ScanServer program uo on the ScanServer PC 2 Scanning a Start ScanItRestoration application b Fill in the Order Form c Follow the On Screen instructions for each scan function required d Save the scans and order information Further details are given in the next section for the common scan functions 169 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved p 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape 3 1 Using The Interface Plate Most objects that will be scanned will be fixed to a simple Interface plate before being inserted into the scanner The Interface Plate facilitates connection between the scan object and the scanner Fixing connectors Figure 3 8 Picture of Top and Bottom of Interface Plate The object to be scanned is commonly fixed to the top of the interface plate using BluTack putty Once the object is fastened into place it can be inserted into the scanner The fixing connectors on the bottom side of the interface plate click into place inside the scanner Each fixing connector has a number of indentations beside it When inserting the object into the scanner it becomes obvious what rotation position is correct 3 2 Scanning A Die One of the simplest scanning operations that can be pe
84. user will be asked to rotate the scanned pontic to the correct orientation as shown in Figure 4 9 For details about the transformation box please refer to the 3Shape DentalDesigner chapter After rotation the user will be asked to scale the scanned pontic to the correct size Subsequently the user can choose to adjust the smooth level of the scan and remove artefacts Orientate Tooth Info Occlusion surface Proximal surface Facial surface Occlusion surface Proximal surface Figure 4 9 Rotate the pontic to the correct orientation 197 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved p 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape At last click on Next to save the scan 4 4 2 Scan crown If a crown library has been selected on the form shown in Figure 4 5 the user will be prompted to insert the crown into the scanner as soon as OK is clicked on The facial surface of the crown should face outside when it is inserted 4 4 2 1 Scanning Height For crown scanning it is important to set the correct scanning height Click on the menu item File Scan Settings see Figure 4 10 and then set the height in the Scan Settings form scanltPontic C 35hape File Help General Scanners Scan Settings i a a Lm E Scan Settings Save lupe Exit E gt outside Crown 5canning Scanning height can be Gedani n Scanning height from top settings penu Figu
85. varies for different Bar shape types The Bar item specific data common for all kinds of connectors include Data Description Descriptive type of shape Currently five types are supported Custom Circular Parsiapetype Elliptical Dolder and Trapezoid e dam Wage end Defines the grid size used when drawing the Bar shape as seen in 95 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark 258 Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved gt Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 UserManual eee 3sha pe Defines the distance between the Placement overview spline and the top of the bar as seen on Distance to spline 96 Distance to gingiva to Distance to gingiva Defines the distance between the lower part of the bar and the Defines the distance between the lower part of the bar and the gingival Tooth elements gap Defines the radius of the gap at the intersection between the bar and the contruction ee radius as seen on 96 specify 0 if no gap is desired The Circular Elliptical Dolder and Trapezoid bar shape types provides additional settings for specifying the number of points used the width height and angle of the bar For the Custom bar shape the data interface provides the possibility of both typing the coordinates used and for drawing in the 2D grid as seen in 95 D
86. weeks 4 Check Out Ctrl U by By status 3D Preview Ctrl W x Delete R Refresh Select Advanced Import Ctrl I Export To File Ctrl E Export To Mail Ctri L Export ERP File Ctrl P Number d1000_20080828_1112 Manufacture Explore Order F4 Creation date 8 28 2008 en Shipping date 8 28 2008 Pater Receive date 8 28 2008 Materia Generate CAM Output F7 Explore CAM Shift F4 Figure 1 33 Export of Order Files to export Orders Pc Documents and Settings All Llsers Application Data 3Shape Denta EI C Documents and Settings All Users 4pplication Data 3ShapelDenta s FTP Settings Server name ftp 3shape com User Password Store settings Figure 1 34 Export Orders by FTP Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved h Ps 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3snape 1 2 7 6 Print Contents The current view of orders can be printed to a standard Printer by selecting Print List Selecting orders with common values for more details please see section 1 2 7 3 can also be used for printing of list for one customer or work for a certain date Sele Options Help EY a SLE LT f ron By date A Order number Create date Delivery date Status Shipping date Manufacturer Items Materiz a Coping 11 21 Zirkon 3Shape Dental Manager u diOO0 20 28 07 2008 12 28 07 2008 Created 28 07 20
87. x Delete a Refresh Select Advanced Print ber d1000_20080729_ 1534 Create date 29 07 2008 Shipping date 29 07 2008 Receive date 29 07 2008 ufacturer Default Manufacturer Tient Default Manufacturer Reset Material Zirkon Height 12 6 mm 12 0 mm olume 94 mmi 76 mmi Coping 12 ManufacturerDefault1 Coping 22 ManufacturerDefault1 Crown 16 14 Figure 1 23 Send Order to Manufacturing The orders are compressed and ready to be sent to the manufacturers FTP server see Figure 1 24 Click Send to start upload the orders The setup is explained in chapter 5 Dental System Control Panel E Send to Manufacturer Orders The following orders are ready to be sent to the specified manuFactuerers Click send to start the upload or click the cancel button to abort Defaul di000_200 29 07 2 29 07 2008 Manufacturer Order number Create Delivery date Shippin Receive Client Items Material Height yu Ho yr 29 07 2 Coping 12 22 Zirkon 12 6 mm 12 0 lemt irder number d1000 20080729 1534 Patient create date 29 07 2008 lateral Zirkon shipping date 29 07 2008 Receive date 29 07 2008 datum Manufacturer Default Manufacturer Coping 12 ManufacturerDefault1 ght 12 6 mm 12 0 mm lume 94 mmi 76 mmi Coping 22 ManufacturerDefaulti Cat Core Cae Figure 1 24 Orders ready to be uploaded to manufacturing 31 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserv
88. 0 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved gt Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 User Manual 3sha pe 5 7 1 5 3Shape Dongle Service The 3Shape Dongle Service see section 0 for further description is also installed during the Upgrade procedure Please press Next to complete the installation Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for 35hape Dongle Service The Installshield R Wizard will install 38hape Dongle Service on vaur Computer To continue click Next WARMING This program is protected by copyright law and international treaties t Cancel Figure 5 103 Installation of the 3Shape Dongle Service 5 1 6 Updating Materials settings The Material settings are all the settings defined within the Dental System Control Panel e g coping thickness parameters i e settings that may have been updated by you previously The Dental System Upgrade application will ask you as part of the upgrade procedure if you want to update certain Material settings as shown below Info The item Copingoverlay1 exists in bath material files and differs in some values Select Update to update to new item values Select Update Al to update all items to new values RECOMMENDED _ Update Figure 5 104 Updating Material settings The reason for this request can be that you have changed the default Material settings originally provided to you this could simpl
89. 08 Default Manufa gt m Today Default Manufa Coping 12 22 Zirkon pocos Bay 41000 2 29 07 2008 15 29 07 2008 Modelled 29 07 2008 T Last two days d1000_20 30 07 2008 10 30 07 2008 Created 30 07 2008 Default Manufa Crown 11 21 Zirkon 7 wd Last week d1000_20 30 07 2008 11 30 07 2008 3E Default Manufa Coping 11 Cro Zirkon s Last two weeks e New Ctrl M 1 Bs bas Us TP Us Y wy By status W di000_20 01 08 2008 15 01 08 2008 SA Modify Ctrl M 3e Created Default Manufa Crown 26 Check In Ctrl H R 3D Preview Ctr W Scanned R Refresh F5 Select Advanced T Other filters Selected Shift F8 Checked out Ld All open 7 4E Search TIT gt 1 Items Selected Label F9 number d1000_20080730_1125 Patient Create date 30 07 2008 Material Zirkon Shipping date 30 07 2008 Coping 11 ManufacturerDefault1 Receive date 30 07 2008 Crown 11 ManufacturerDefault1 rer Default Manufacturer _ 3shape gt Figure 1 35 Printing All Orders In a List An example is shown below Date 10 10 2007 Page 1 1 List Printed by Martin Andersen Delivery date Order ID Order number Manufacturer Client Items Material Height Volume Status 05 10 2007 9999110348389 1020 99991 20071004 Miller s Milling Brite Smile Coping 16 Zirkon Scanned 05 10 2007 9999111441389 1452 99991 20071003 Miller s Milling B
90. 1 21 07 2008 16 21 07 2008 b 2 d1000 20 28 07 2008 11 28 07 2008 Dm we d1000 20 28 07 2008 12 gt 8 di000 20 29 07 2008 15 Bc M d1000 20 30 07 2008 10 b s amp s di000 20 30 07 2008 11 30 07 2008 we 28 07 2008 V m Modify Ctrl M 21 07 2008 Next n Import Scan mc New Ctrl N 29 07 2008 Check out Ctrl U 30 07 2008 X Delete a Refresh Select Advanced Print Reset Default Manufa Default Manufa Default Manufa Default Manufa Default Manufa Default Manufa Default Manufa Default Manufa Order number di1000 20080721 1426 Jerry Smith Create date 21 07 2008 Shipping date 21 07 2008 21 07 2008 Manufacturer Default Manufacturer Client Patent Smith Michael Material Zirkon Crown 14 ManufacturerDefault1 Crown 16 ManufacturerDefault1 Bridge 23 27 ManufacturerDefault1 Figurel 18 Scan Order PEE Options Help Crown 16 14 Zirkon Crown 11 Crown 11 Bridge 11 21 Coping 11 21 Coping 12 22 Crown 11 21 Coping 11 Cro 1Items Selected 3sshape 27 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved P 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape Close the ScanItRestoration after scanning to store the Scan El ScanitRestoration MJUpcO3Y3ShapeWM1000 20080721 1426 Jerry Smithid1000 20080721 1426 Jerry Smith xml TB x File Help X Insert arch r n aa
91. 1 Difficult Materials amp Abutments It should be noted that some materials are unsuitable for scanning this includes transparent and reflective materials For scanning Abutments it is advisable to use a primer spray to alter the reflectivity of the surface Painting the surface can also be suitable in some cases See also Spraying Help Sheet 3 3 Scanning A Wax Up A Die and its corresponding Wax Up can be scanned In the Order Form screen the Wax Up option should be selected for the highlighted tooth The Wax up should be prepared as suggested in section 3 7 2 1 Once the rest of the order information is added OK can be clicked to start the scanning process File View Help Scanning Tooth 16 with Wax up Scanning Anf Points scanned State Scanning e G Ge c G G e A e eGec 666 Figure 3 13 Scanning A Wax Up and Die The onscreen instructions can be followed to achieve the required outcome 17 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved gt 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape Scanning and Saving finished By clicking on the overview window single scan operations can be carried out e S amp a G a a p t R Figure 3 14 Result of Die and Wax Up scan The outcome is then saved and a rescan can be taken if necessary 3 7 4 Bridge Scan This section will provide a guide to all the steps that must be acc
92. 1s active the user can add material to the crown or abutment with the main end of the stylus while the excessive material can be removed with the opposite end of the stylus e Pressure Sensitivity Support When the Add Remove Smooth function is active the user can increase or decrease the amount of the added removed or smoothed material by applying more or less pressure on the stylus 160 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved gt 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape 2 2 SpaceBall Support Spaceball is a motion controller that works in conjunction with the mouse and enables the user to navigate through 3D images quickly The device contains the navigation ball and programmable buttons The SpaceBall device is shown on the image below Utilization of 3D software implies the use of different keyboards keys interface buttons and mouse buttons to switch between panning rotating and view zooming This awkward way of working is eliminated by employing the Spaceball as the single controller that can be now used to complete many functions without having to toggle between different navigation modes 161 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved p 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape 3 ScanltRestoration 3 1 Foreword The objective of this chapter is to provide the user with guidance on how to operate the 3Shape D250 and D640 3D scanners and the associated 3D scanning softwa
93. 2 29 07 2008 15 30 07 2008 10 01 08 2008 15 Status 28 07 2008 Created 29 07 2008 Modelled 30 07 2008 Created 30 07 2008 Scanned 01 08 2008 Scanned Shipping date 28 07 2008 29 07 2008 30 07 2008 we New E Modify Check In Ctrl N Ctrl M Ctrl H Manufacturer Default Manufa Default Manufa Default Manufa Default Manufa Items Coping 11 21 Coping 12 22 Crown 11 21 Coping 11 Cro Crown 26 Materia Zirkon Zirkon Zirkon Zirkon Zirkon A 3D Preview Ctrl W This order is also going to be selected since it has the same status Ma 3 Other filters Reset Checked out TT All open 7 F as Search B Scanned Ra Refresh F5 Modelled Lic Same Patient Ckri Alt P Advanced Same Client Ctrl Alk C Same Status Ctrl Alt 5 Same Delivery Date Ctrl Alt D Same Shipping Date Same Receive Date Height Range Ctrl 4lt H Volume Range Ctrl Alt 1 Items Selected er di000 20080730 1125 Patient iste 30 07 2008 terial Zirkon te 30 07 2008 te 30 07 2008 turer Default Manufacturer Coping 11 ManufacturerDefaulti Crown 11 ManufacturerDefaulti Figure 1 31 Select Orders with Common Values 1 2 7 4 Creating output for local production using generic machines the Generate CAM Output function Depending on purchase conditions the 3Shape Dental System s output can be used with any
94. 2008 10 01 57 AM 10 10 2008 Coping 21 Zirkon Scanned Last two days Last week Last two weeks by By status Created P Other filters Checked out a All open iumber d1000_20081009_1648 facturer Default Manufacturer on date 10 9 2008 client jate 10 11 2008 Patient oping date 11 30 2008 Material Zirkon at 12 5 mm 13 5 mm olume 213 mmi 142 mmi Crown 21 Default Manufacturer Crown 22 Default Manufacturer 10rder s selected with 2 unit s sshape Figure 5 106 An order created in DentalManager s C M3S5hapeM 2345 20071218 0314 Jesper Jones File Edit DER view Favorites Tools Help d d c A h i iv Searc E Folders Address EQ C X3Shapel12345 20071218 0314 Jesper Jones Ele X Name Sige Type X DEAD File Folder T iLjModeDobID MJID Site20117963707 11 File Folder 12345 20071218 0314 Jesper Jones xml XML Document 5 4 My Computer Sw Local Disk C B iL _BugReports Ga 3Shape e 12345 20071218 _0314_Jesper_jones I3 CAD DentalDesignerModellingTree 3ml E DentalDesignerModellingTree log le Manufacturers 3ml Materials xml 3ML File Text Document 3ML File XML Document Z3 ModelJobID MJID 5ite20117963707 11 Figure 5 107 The content in the order directory opened by pressing F4 The CAD folder is only for internal 3Shape file formats and can not be used for manufacturing C 3Shape
95. 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual E ScanltRestoration Pc60 3Shape Generic dental saves test number1 number1 xml File View Help ADRES Ei Trim Bite Delete aren amp amp d d G e ee Qag f er Figure 3 27 Marking and deleting the excess from the bite scan sshape Kek mx The selection tools shown in Figure 3 27 should be used to mark unnecessary areas of the bite scan Basically the edges should be removed leaving only the imprint of the upper teeth Once this task has been carried out then OK should be selected When Next is selected the steps from section 3 7 4 3 to section 3 7 4 6 can be followed for the rest of the bridge At the end of these tasks the final dialogue will be displayed The next image shows typically how the entire order will look in terms of scans at this final stage 182 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved pe 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 UserMamual 35hape E ScanitRestoration c 3Shape 1 528601474_Van Bitten 1528601474_Van Bitten xml Ele Veew Help Scanning and Saving finished Click on overview window to redo single scan operations a d d G 6 e egag d 6 1 C Figure 3 28 Final saving of Bite screen Once a similar result to the above has been attained the order 1s ready to be processed in Dental
96. 214 5 5 1 1 Database settings and shared database eeeeessssssssscccceccccccceecceceeaeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeseeaaaaaes 214 5 5 2 Manufacturing Inbox PRENNE 215 5 5 3 so Fol a E E E E aie E S E E E 215 5 5 4 CIR eU T HR 215 5 5 5 N OC OE E E E ee ee eee eee 216 5 5 6 ERP and Processing Time Settings sasesana aa EN TETEN EE EAEE ENSE 217 5 5 7 Wakara m E 218 sr ur d NS SAR Bs rc 218 5 6 1 DEAS AC Coors RR RERO ess acto soc sa esc ecico seo on ose aes ee nae eee 220 p M PH 224 5 6 3 SPI PEE E P E EEEE I TE EE EEE E A E T A 224 S A O NETTE mcr 224 Ia SCIUNT E ne R E E or ee ee eee eee 224 5 6 4 Naara MN UNE RTTT E 225 ig TTBS rcc c 225 SEP MEME II cA EN mU TT 228 3 543 IVAN ACUI MO ROC CSS contine oateeesoteuuuete cibus at eie Li ee DLE ELI ee 229 s EMEN 230 5 6 5 Con edle II ETE TL UM 230 SUI CIMT senmi Sys EE TTE erasa voa ipe tead einst baba a a A ado 231 SEE MEE GEI EP T RU m m TE 233 To C MG i n ELE 235 ToU MEG UU MCN 236 55 5 COP Oy Ci S cessi otescoibessdciast boten debut tiae an odes but bert MER aMEea a RUNE RPM um Een 237 3000 Primary Ce otc 0 hc a a re eee E ere R ee ee eee ee an 238 SE Telescope overlay NNRERERRN
97. 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved gt Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 User Manual 3sha pe 5 6 4 Manufacturing The manufacturing data involves the actual manufacturing of the construction elements including the available manufacturers specified in the Site items together with labs and clinics and materials as well as the manufacturing processes Central to the manufacturing of dental constructions are the materials from which the construction elements are made Most of the construction elements must be associated with a specific material see section 0 5 6 4 1 Sites The term Site is used as a common expression for labs manufacturers and clinics and the Site items defines the current site as well as other sites that are of interest to the current site e g customers or partners The Site items are fundamental w r t defining relations between the current and other sites and it is these items which allow DentalManager to easily transfer orders from the current site to a central manufacturing site and vice versa The Site item data interface is illustrated in Figure 5 28 and in the following the different parts of the Site item data interface is explained in details The users can import sites from the Excel document New in 2008 see Figure 5 28 which makes the workflow easier and faster The format of the Exce
98. 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved gt Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 User Manual 3sha pe 182 xxx XXX XXX el sj anonymous b is oi ia oits E E HE E s iis i is os is E SE SE Inbox Mo TLS Support v DI Test connection Figure 5 31 Site item FTP settings The Site item register the address and other contact information of the site as shown in Figure 5 32 My address 1254 Copenhagen Denmark bul 45 12345607 mylabi amp rnmylab cam www mylabxyz cam John Hansan Figure 5 32 Site item contact settings For the Site item an import functionality Import site s from server is available in the upper left part of the interface as shown in 28 Pressing this link will automatically import a number of sites including IDs and FTP settings thus facilitating the setup for order transfering through DentalManager Please note that the import functionality will only work if your Software Provider of the Dental System has already provided these settings for you e g 1f the provider has already defined a number of central manufacturing sites available for you NOTE The discussion and figures in this section assumes that the 3Shape Dental System 1s a standard non encrypted system For encrypted systems several of the settings can not be edited by the users as they are already provided by the Software Provider of your s
99. 5 Move up a Move down Recycle bin e 1item 5 Restore all items a Empty the Recycle Bin Details Total 2 items pe Figure 5 21 Item Interface with listed items displayed left and data displayed right The items are altered by selecting an item from the list with the mouse and then performing one of the general operations on the left or updating the data associated with the chosen item on the right The general operations are listed below Operation Description Adds a new item to the list When adding an item the user is prompted with the dialog Add on Figure 5 22 An identification must then be entered unique among the existing items the dialog will only accept an ID if it is unique When pressing OK the item is created Some 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark 220 Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved gt Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 User Manual 3sha pe items may have default values of data when created Adding an item to the Operator list on Figure 5 21 and entering the ID on Figure 5 22 will result in Figure 5 23 The new item is selected on the list and the initial name is Not named see further description of the item Name below Copies the currently selected item highlighted in the list When copying an item the user Copy must enter an ID as described under Add
100. A Margin line A Die interface Add remove material A Coping Add remove material Figure 2 134 Transformation o Morph The morph functionally enables the user to modify specific areas of the crown Silhouette morph The user can change the shape of a crown by dragging the black shade turns green HINT The area of impact can be changed by the scroll wheel on the mouse Point morph The coloured areas can be morphed independently in the viewing plane via left clicking These areas are defined in the library for molar and premolar teeth HINT The following keyboard buttons extend effectiveness of the morphing function SHIFT moves all areas of the same colour CONTROL moves an area in one dimension a combination of the crown surface and view direction ALT adds removes the user defined areas 127 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual Ej DentalDesigner WJpcO3l3ShapeYd1000 20080926 1507Xd1000 20080926 1507 xml File View Help EI CRANES Crown Scans Preparation Crown C Collision lines Minimum wall thickness C Cut neighbors Shape edit mode Reo undo undo at Design Sa 9 Automatic transformation AU 4 Crown degrading Show distance to C Adjacent C Preparation scan a Antagonist scan teate VEN A Advanced settings Min wa
101. Color Scale Settings e In Advanced settings Figure 2 53 the colour scale can be disabled configured to show the thickness of the added removed material click Difference map or the overall thickness of the item being modelled click Depth map Advanced Show color map Disabled Difference map Thickness map OO Show target area Disabled Q Circle Figure 2 53 Advanced Settings e Use the Show target area radio buttons to either turn on or disable visualization of the area affected by the add remove material operation e To compare the modified model with the original one visually hold down the Show Orig button e Pressing the Clear button in the dialog box permanently deletes all changes made e The Undo and Redo buttons can be used to remove or reapply the last actions made NOTE The OK button finishes the modification of the item DentalDesigner automatically switches to the next element in the modelling job that is not yet finished You can come back to the coping or primary telescope item at any time either by clicking on the item in the Overview toolbar or by clicking on the actual model in the modelling window WARNING When removing material from a coping or primary telescope it is no longer guaranteed that the requested minimum thickness is obtained This may affect the manufacturing process 88 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved
102. D RM LLL P a ee neu BBS CEU EL ee TES aitzoe m Cer eat M ii ER F X p E X z ae A co p orm x y 7 1 7 RM LN amp tons sshape CAD sshape HL DE Figure 2 22 Keyboard editing of points Figure 2 23 Mouse editing of points HINT It is important that the eight points are placed close to the margin line for all the dies as this placement affects the insertion direction estimate and especially the margin line detection Therefore it is strongly recommended that the user briefly inspects all dies and replaces the points using either the keyboard or the mouse editing mode as described above When the points are positioned correctly on all coping wax up and telescope items in the restoration an optimisation procedure automatically provides an estimate of the insertion direction The current restoration will be rotated into a position proposing this direction as the user point of view as visualized in Figure 2 24 67 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual File View Help p B 53 f20 E v Insertion direction 7 z mn Sh Directions 3 Insertion direction A 4 jr Edit points Cine o e e i Optimize direction F4 e Set direction eA c Approximate height 8 30 mm e 4 Manual change Y e amp Difference map A gy te Co
103. Designer 3 7 6 Double Preparation Scan If a Double Preparation Scan is required then this option should be selected on the Order Form This option simply means that the same object can be scanned twice The first scan can be the object with any extra features on it this could be markers to aid later positioning etc Then the second scan can be just the object by itself The 2 scans are automatically aligned and saved 183 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved pe 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3sha pe 3 7 7 Neighbourhood Scan Relative Position The Order Form has a Check Box called Neighbourhood Scan see chapter 1 2 2 Create an Order for more details This is highlighted in the figure below order Form m cu ete MET E Lab information Order details Operator onde E 1551 demo 20070604 Lab Martin s Lab i Normal Clinic information Clinic Defaut Cink Order details Contact person Delivery date 2007 06 05 Patient information Reference Comments 0299 CGE Cosse cea U ri T Figure 3 29 Neighbourhood scan Checked 184 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved ne gt 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape 3 8 Abutment Scan 3 7 8 1 Scan Abutments Once an order has been defined on the Order Form refer to the DentalManager for details the user will
104. Direction Group 1 Figure 2 159 Insertion direction for the Ist group Figure 2 160 Insertion direction for the 2nd group NOTE Modelling individual abutments the user has to define multiple insertion directions for every abutment top cap whereas modelling of an abutment bridge requires just one insertion direction for the whole restoration e The Next button in the Info toolbar is enabled as soon as the insertion direction is estimated Pressing this button will take the user to the next stage of the modelling process 2 6 2 4 Stage 3 Design Overview See Overview chapter 3 4 For each item in the restoration the Process toolbar contains a number of specific operational steps In the following the handling of these steps associated with constructing a customised abutment is generally explained See chapters 2 4 4 1 to 2 4 4 5 for the steps associated with various other types of dental item Process e The first element in the modelling job is automatically activated when entering the Design stage of the modelling process 146 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3shape 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual Not all steps for a specific element need to be handled by the user some are optional and others have valid default settings The user can freely switch between the steps in the Process toolbar for a specific element and AbutmentDesigner will automatically rebuild the ob
105. Dongle license server port 27027 n Open status page JI Configure services Figure 5 4 3Shape Dongle Service The location of the 3Shape Dongle Service can be defined in different ways It can be manually typed it can be defined by clicking This PC button if the Dental System Control Panel is started from the PC where the 3Shape Dongle Service is installed or we can simply click on the Browse button to open up a file tree and locate the Dongle Service 205 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape The dongle licenser port specifies the network port used by the service If this port needs to be changed e g due to a Firewall or if another application is already using this port it can be changed here and at the same time it needs to be manually changed in a configuration xml file located with the service When the 3Shape Dongle Service is located and the port specified the connection can by tested by pressing the Test connection button If the connection is successful a green check mark is shown otherwise an informative error message is shown The status page provides a fast and easy overview of the licenses available on the system The status page shown in Figure 5 5 1s displayed when pressing the Open status page button and it shows the number of licenses points available for the different applications and the number of licenses currently in u
106. F e 117 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual Order Form ee ee oa ET EU Lab information g Order settings Scan settings ul s Ez Operator Order number jeunes 1 652 l ObjecE type Lab Martin s Lab iv Extern Order number Antagonist D eee O Importance Normal Double preparation Clinic information Relative position Clinic Default Clinic iv Order settings Contact person Order date 08 06 2007 iv Delivery date 09 08 2007 iv Clinic order no Delivery type Ship to different address Shipping address Methad Waxup single uni w Coping r Patient information Last name First name Reference Comments pem us CI Additional Figure 2 123 Finalizing the wax up bridge 2 5 13 3 Design e Step 1 Margin Line See Chapter 2 5 3 e Step 2 Die Interface See Chapter 2 5 5 e Step 3 Wax up Bridge Under the Advanced settings the user will find seven parameters see Figure 2 124 Any changes on the first three above the line will affect the entire wax up bridge Changes on the four last ones below the line will only affect the selected model o Bridge offset see Chapter 4 10 1 o Min wall thickness see Chapter 4 10 1 o Smoothing With this parameter the user can change the smoothness of the surface o Cut
107. Finish ff Remove artefacts A Margin line R Die interface Ph Load crown fe Modify crown Em EM RE Add remove material E Add remove material crown li Sy Figure 2 144 Initializing the spline be e Como T ER 4 E AEG eee M Figure 2 145 Manual change of the connection offset spline a User input by mouse b Resulting spline NOTE The fast editing of the spline is also possible The user can draw the spline with the cursor without being very precise and the program will automatically even it up 134 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved p 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape a b a User input by mouse b Resulting spline Add remove material This step is to add or remove material off the crown and coping elements 2 5 14 3 Full crown bridge Along with modelling single crowns DentalDesigner enables the user to model multi item crown bridges of different complexity This section describes the operations involved in the modelling of a crown bridge At the moment only single layer bridges are available See chapter 2 5 10 for details of how to build individual crown and connector models correspondingly e Inthe Order form a crown bridge is defined as shown on Figure 2 146 NOTE Crown is selected for elements residing on dies and Pontic is selected for elements residing on gingiva e A bridge is normally set to have no connectors connector typ
108. G It is generally recommended to move the spline points out of undercut areas since undercuts at the margin line may result in a bad fit Therefore it is recommended to quickly visualize the automatically extracted points in order to check if one or more points are in the undercut area The points can be moved either manually or using the Step button e When the Step button is pressed the points on the spline can be changed by the user using keyboard in the following way o Press the RIGHT and LEFT arrow keys on the keyboard to change between the points each point is displayed as a green ball placed on a red line on the individual die o Press the UP and DOWN arrow keys on the keyboard to move the points up and down HINT If a point needs to be moved a long distance press CTRL UP or SHIFT UP to move the point even faster use the DOWN key in a similar way 78 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape o When the points are moved using the keyboard the right 2D view in the View toolbar shows the intersection illustrated by the red line and the current location of the point please note that the position 1s updated in the 2D view when moving the point This allows for a precise positioning of the individual points in the margin line as illustrated in Figure 2 40 When the Step button is not pres
109. LINE F Stretch 0 00 qf Morph to fit stomp i F1 ness Cun unn Figure 2 76 Morph mode Figure 2 77 Show collisions 98 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved gt 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 UserMamual 3Shape Figure 2 78 Silhouette morph top and surface morph bottom NOTE The OK button finishes the pontic DentalDesigner will then automatically switch to the next element of the modelling job that is not yet finished You can come back to the pontic at any time either by clicking on the pontic in the Overview toolbar or by clicking on the actual model in the modelling window 2 5 10 Connector This section describes the operations involved in the modelling of a connector 2 5 10 1 Add connector Overview The aim of this step is to modify connectors DentalDesigner places the connectors automatically based on a customizable default position size and shape of the connector The connector type to be used can be selected when defining the order and changed in real time while modelling The default presets related to each type of connector can be customised in the Dental System Control Panel 99 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual S DentalDesigner C 3shape 20070529 1452120070529 1452 xml MARI File View Help 83x SBS 258545 f gt 2 8 P Design Settings E Eje CT E M Reposition spline
110. Milling rder settings First name John Manufacturer Type Comments a Abutment Bridge Index Additional Figure 1 7 Selecting color for the restoration material Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved gt 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 UserMamal SAPO Order Form Lab information Order settings Scan settings mi PN Operator Andrea Steven we Order number di000_20080901_1 122 cest type Model Importance Mormal w Antagonist Mane w Double preparation F Relative position Client John Doe v P vi Contact person Create date 9 1 2008 Order settings Shipping date 9i 1 2008 T Client information Patient information Last name smith e e Comments age Circular emm o EM Index Additional Figurel 8 Selection of a specific restoration colour change 18 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual Order Form Lab information Order settings Operator Andrea Steven ae Order number Importance Client information Contact person Create date 9j 1 2008 Order settings shipping date 9i 1 2008 Patient information Last name Smith First name John Comments Index Additional d1000 20080901 1 lzz wm sshape Scan settings GEE hype Antagonist Double preparation Relative position Coping
111. Search A JOBIEBIEI om Orders Fr By date 3 Today a Last two days a Last week T Last two weeks by By status Created ww Create date 28 07 2008 12 4 29 07 2008 15 30 07 2008 10 a 30 07 2008 11 Delivery date 28 07 2008 29 07 2008 30 07 2008 30 07 2008 Scanned Shipping date 28 07 2008 29 07 2008 30 07 2008 o9 Next w Model a New w i E Modify Manufacturer Default Manufa Default Manufa Default Manufa Rult Manufa F6 Ctrl D Ctrl N Ctrl M w Re Scan Ctri Alt R R 3D Preview EZ x Delete ae Refresh Select Advanced Print Reset Items Coping 11 21 Coping 12 22 Crown 11 21 Coping 11 Cro gt Inder number d1000_20080730_1125 Patient ate 30 07 2008 Shipping date 30 07 2008 sceiye date 30 07 2008 turer Default Manufacturer ent li Coping 11 ManufacturerDefault1 Crown 11 ManufacturerDefaulti 3shape 1 Items Selected Figure 1 28 Check Out Orders 34 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved gt 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape When the orders have been processed they can be re imported into the Dental System database Select the orders ready for check in as shown below on Figure 1 29 and select the local order path The orders will be integrated and status updated 3Shape Dental Manager Sees Orders Opt
112. Selections step serves two purposes 1 Specifying what part of the scan preparation i e which gingival area corresponds to which abutment as you can see in the Figure 2 157 there is a blue control point for each of the five implant preparations and each of the two prospective abutments On top of each control point stands an annotation showing what job corresponds to that part of the scan and what its index number is FDI notation as default For instance on top of the left control point you can read Tooth 26 meaning that on top on the underlying implant the user is supposed to model an abutment and the abutment is the 26 according to the FDI notation system 2 Approximately determining the front side of the abutment top cap manually placing selections blue control points on the buccal front part of the scan model will help the system to recognize the front side of the corresponding top caps 143 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved p 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape NOTE Selections for abutments always need to be created manually ProcessSimilarly as for pontics selections for abutments need to be defined as shown in Figure 2 157 The best way to add control points is to place them from the front and not on the top of the gingiva or the top of an implant Placing the control point correctly will reduce the possibility of incorrect restoration handling in future Selections Al
113. Shape Dental System a globally unique ID 1s defined for each site This means that each site lab having one or more licenses to a Dental System is defined by an ID which identifies this site on the global level This has a number of advantages when transferring orders between sites using DentalManager NOTE The ID of the current site is automatically provided this globally unique value as shown in Figure 5 29 This ID is typically a 5 digit number keeping the ID short and without characters allows for barcode printing within DentalManager without making the barcodes too long The ID may be changed manually using the Change ID button but it is strongly recommended to keep the provided globally unique ID especially if wanting to transfer orders between sites In case the ID has been changed manually by mistake we therefore recommend pressing the Get from server button in order to retrieve the globally unique ID once again 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark 226 Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 User Manual 12345 Change ID Bly lab This site mn sshape Sub site ID 1 E Order number site ID 12345 Copy ID Figure 5 29 Site item IDs NOTE The check box This site defines which site in the list of sites is the current site When choosing a site as the
114. Shape Dental System apply floating licenses This means that it is only necessary with a single dongle containing all the available licenses client points for the entire site and the new 3Shape Dongle Service handles all the license requests when a 3Shape Dental System application starts If more licenses are purchased then additional client points are simply added to the same dongle The great advantage for the customer is that it is no longer necessary to move the dongle between the different PCs but that e g DentalDesigner can run on any PC in the network it simply requires that the DentalDesigner PC can connect to the PC where the 3Shape Dongle Service is installed If more client points are available then more DentalDesigner applications can be started simultaneously Also purchasing more licenses becomes significantly easier as it is no longer necessary to ship a new physical dongle the dongle can simply be updated through the Control Panel When the floating licenses are combined with a shared installation shared DentalManager database for all PCs an extremely powerful configuration can be obtained for larger sites 5 7 3 Inspection of Dental System Control Panel settings After updating a previous installation it 1s generally recommended to inspect the settings in the Dental System Control Panel The sections below specifies the areas in the Control Panel which should be focused on 5 7 3 1 System settings The System settings p
115. WanufacturingDir 1 2345_ 20071218 0314 Jesper Jones File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Oo Back x J Search Folders E ddress DB C 35hape ManufacturingDir12345_20071218_0314_Jesper_Jones Folders e 1818 di243 20071003 e 1905 di243 20071003 e 2036 diD03 20071003 e 12345 20071218 0314 Jesper Jones Name Na Size Type 12345 20071218 0314 Jesper Jones D stl 3 229 KB Certificate Trust List Figure 5 108 The content in the manufacturing output directory opened by pressing Shift F4 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark 269 Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved gt Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 User Manual 3sha pe 5 3 5 Material settings In general it is always recommended to inspect all Material settings after an Upgrade process As previously mentioned during the Upgrade of Material settings some of your preferred settings may have been changed if you have chosen this during the upgrade In the following we will focus on some of the settings 5 7 3 6 Sites The term Site is used as a common expression for labs manufacturers and clinics and the Site items include your own site as well as other sites that are of interest to you e g customers or partners The Site items are important for defining relations between your site and other sites and it is these 1tem
116. ade from the position of the mouse cursor when the user presses the left button on the mouse Some functions of the Visualization Toolbar are available as Keyboard shortcuts Right click and press the following keys to perform the following visualization actions Keyboard Visualization Function ALT Pan View When pressed use right mouse button to pan the view CTRL Rotate View When pressed use right mouse button to rotate the view SHIFT Zoom In Out When pressed use right mouse button to zoom in and out Alternatively the mouse can be used in the following ways Mouse Visualization Function Middle Button Pan View When pressed move the mouse to pan the view Right Mouse Rotate View When pressed move the mouse to rotate the view Mouse Wheel Zoom In Out When pressed move the mouse to zoom in and out 3 5 4 Teeth Overview Map The Teeth Overview Map can be viewed to attain information on the current operations in progress It will show the highlighted teeth and the scan operations to be performed on them The teeth are mapped using generic dental nomenclature this can be setup in the Dental System Control Panel 167 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved gt 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape 3 5 5 General Scan Settings The FILE menu allows access to general settings relating to the scans These settings are divided up into 2 Tab menus Scan Settings Scan Settings jo
117. age specifies the location of all the different applications The location of DentalManager ScanItRestoration and DentalDesigner must be defined however these locations will normally always be specified as part of the upgrade procedure otherwise simply click the Browse button to find the applications The locations of ScanItPontic and the 3Shape 3D Viewer is optional and not a requirement for using the Dental System 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark 266 Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 User Manual fx lH Save E Back Navigation Home p Tasks ScanltLibrary lj Set Dentalbesigner path scanltLibrary is currently defined as Set ScanItReskoration path WUpcnr3shape Dental System scanTtLibrary Browse Y Set ScanitLibrary path Set DentalManager path QE TS DentalManager x ji Set 30 Viewer path m je Browse For 35hape Dongle Pentallanager is currently defined as Service computer ee 1 Upc03 Shape Dental System DentalManager Browse W Set Order directory path HINREDS a y gary L Browse Details 3D Viewer A DentalDesigner 3D Viewer is currently defined as Installed ARE TTE y I pcaay3shape Dental Systemt3shape 3D Viewer M Browse ScanitRestoration E af Installed scanitbibrary Remote license management server A af Installed ee
118. agen K Denmark 260 Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved gt Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 User Manual 3sha pe 5 1 Upgrade of previous installation Upgrading a previous version of 3Shape Dental System is done using the Dental System Upgrade application During the upgrade you will be asked to make a choice regarding the type of installation whether or not to create backup and which Material settings you would like to update Also you will be installing two new applications DentalManager and 3Shape Dongle Service The following sections provide information to guide you through the different steps in the upgrade procedure E Trend dental system J per AOE Next Figure 5 98 Dental System Upgrade 5 7 1 1 Type of installation The first step in the Dental System Upgrade process is to choose the type of installation 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark 261 Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 User Manual sshape 3Shape Dental System Upgrade Choose installation Ef s a Choose installation There are different upgrade procedures for different installation types Please choose which installation type is suitable for this computer WEIT D
119. ail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 User Manual The default URL to the 3Shape update server can be reviewed through the Connection setup feature under the Tasks tab It is normally never necessary to change this URL 3shape M Dental ystem Control Panel Dongle Update ed g Back 2 Home Save Tasks A D Dongle Uy Connection setup http www 3shape com LicenseManagement LicenseWebServer exe soap Test connection Figure 5 14 Dongle Connection Setup The server URL from Figure 5 14 should be used unless informed otherwise by 3Shape If a proxy server is in use at the server s location then the details need to be specified as described in section 5 3 9 5 5 DentalManager The DentalManager settings are customized in the DentalManager tab These settings include database manufacturing and inbox which is described in the following When entering the DentalManager from the main menu a screen similar to Figure 5 15 appears depending on the dongle configuration Manufacturing and Manufacturing Inbox are Add ons to the DentalManager The accessibility of these modules can be explored by opening the server status page in the System Settings as shown in Figure 5 5 TER ap o oj xl Tasks Manufacturing e Details TET STE MIT Ts ERP and nraressii Database settings ai ff Databas
120. ake the insertion of the restoration in the mouth possible There may also be production issues having undercuts in the final models The undercuts are removed by checking the Remove undercuts checkbox The effect is illustrated in Figure 2 46 and Figure 2 47 e Ifa milling machine is used for production it may be desirable to use the Drill compensation function This compensation adds additional offset to the interface in areas having too high curvature compared to the radius of the applied drill tool This ensures that milling of the interface 1s possible which in turn guarantees a better fit to the final manufactured restoration The effect produced on the interface surface 1s illustrated in Figure 2 50 Difference map settings 04 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved p 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape e The amount of offset can be visualized using the buttons in the Difference map settings All difference maps show the difference between a given model and the scan model prior to offsetting The difference offset can be seen from the colour scale or the mouse can be moved over the model o When the None button is selected default no difference map is shown o When the Standard button is selected the die interface model is coloured according to the difference between the offset model and the scanned reference model o When the Undercut removal button is selec
121. an Figure 2 132 Surface measurement Antagonist scan e Shape edit mode In the Shape edit mode the user can modify the shape of the crown o Edit crown boundary This function is to define which part of the crown will blend to the margin line and which will stay intact Only the part above the line will be adapted to the margin line To edit the crown boundary click on the green turn yellow control points and drag them 125 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual File View Help SAS BARKS EEE Design weve Shape edit mode Back Next v Q gt l l I vom Tas NN assis 3 nddiremove material DPQ Figure 2 133 Edit crown boundary O Transformation The functions used are the same as in the pontic modelling See chapter 2 5 9 2 126 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual E DentalDesigner Wpc03 3Shape d1000 20080926 1507 d1000 20080926 _ 1507 xml x File View Help ee LA SBR GAB KY Crown Design Shape edit mode G ti e 2 2 Advanced settings Min wall thickness 0 25 f mm Prep line offset 0 100 mm Offset angle 1 65 00 file Extension offset 0 100 3 mm Morph dstence Re 1 26 jom i neo Crown 26 Finish S Remove artefacts J
122. an settings Eder number IdiDDO 20071016 1017 Antagonist E 3 zl Importance Narmal v Double preparation Neighborhood scan Operator Client information Client Default Manufacturer Contact person Order date Order details Patient information Last name First name Comments ww ontic oping Telescope 4 f visi i Wibal 4 3 mm Wital 4 3 mm wikal 3 5 mm Alwital 5 0 mm T d ey G e Secce Index Additional ee Figure 2 154 Menu with choice of implant kit type See Figure 2 155 for the menu which defines the shape of the bar in a four item abutment bridge Note that the shape can be modified at later stages of design process and functions just as an approximate setting in the Order Form 141 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved P 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape Order Form Seles Lab information Order details Scan settings E NNNM CU RR n CN j A i Ee a mim 4 1077 Leth eee he I Operator Internal ofger number eto ATUS 318 2 UV BE Model Order number id10D0 20071016 1021 Antagonist Mone AX y Importance Normal v Double preparation Relative positian Client information Client Contact person Order date Order details Patient information Last name First name Comments System
123. ap model Process 4 Top cap e Clickthel button on the Process toolbar A dialog box will appear e The mouse is used for the general transformation of the template abutment top cap model o The top cap is translated moved by simply dragging the model with the mouse o The top cap is scaled by dragging one of the corner points marked with green of the bounding box When pressing SHIFT simultaneously the top cap will be scaled in all directions o The Rotation mode specifies how the top cap is rotated If the Axis rotation is checked then the rotation will occur in a given plane marked in yellow while Free rotation results in a fully free rotation according to the mouse movement The top cap is rotated by clicking and dragging on one of the central points marked with purple The adjacent arrows illustrate the direction of the orientation For comparison see Figure 2 167 and Figure 2 168 153 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved gt 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape w Abutment tap cap Rotate around axes gt a Top cap shape A Abutment top cap Rotate in all directions Top cap shape 5 Transformation Transformation Rotation mode v Free Axis Morph made O UC mH d Rotation mode Free v s 4 Morph mode F Remove Undercuts v Fit to Emergence Profile Fit To
124. ape A S All rights reserved h Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 User Manual ssnape 5 6 5 13 Abutments 3Shape Dental System is an open system where all kinds of implant systems can be added and used to create customized abutments for these systems To be able to create customized abutments a number of auxiliary CAD models must be prepared and added into the dental system This section describes which models are needed how they should be created and how to configure the Dental System to take advantage of these implant systems The abutment data page illustrated in 85 contains two sections One for adding top cap libraries and one for adding and configuring implant systems Dental System Control Panel Abutments eg 13 Back v Home q Save ep Top cap libraries ep Implant systems i ccs ol ku Top cap libraries Implant systems I Figure 5 85 Abutment data page 5 6 5 14 Top cap libraries The top cap libraries page shown in 86 allows definition of a libraries of abutment top caps used during abutment modelling The functionality is similar to that of defining pontic libraries 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark 2417 Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved gt Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 User Manual 3sha pe DI Dental System Control Panel Top cap libraries tal Save OQ Back Navi
125. ar that interconnects the abutment top cap units within a customized abutment bridge 2 6 2 5 Stage 4 Finalise See chapter 2 4 5 2 6 2 6 Stage 5 Save Export See chapter 2 4 6 Figure 2 161 The modelling steps of an abutment 147 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved h bs 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual ssnape 2 6 3 Modelling operations As mentioned above this chapter offers a detailed description of the operations in the modelling process of different types of restorations involving customised abutment design The operations which are common to the modelling of multiple dental items within a single complex restoration are covered here only minimally and can be referred to in chapter 2 5 2 6 3 1 Overview A list of modelling operations available in Abutment Designer is given in Figure 2 162 Button Operation Also used for items Remove artefacts remove scan artefacts Coping Telescope Wax up S Remove artefacts Emergence profile define the shape of the abutment exit profile Load load top cap model to be Coping Telescope Wax up selected for the abutment top cap from library PY Top cap edit shape of the lop cap abutment top cap T Add remove material add and Coping Telescope Wax up 3 Add remove material remove material on the item surface Assembly assembly parts of the assembly customised abutment defining screw settings Edit bar edit t
126. arp angles at the tip This is highlighted in Figure 3 20 below Recommended Fa Recommended angle Non recommended angles Figure 3 20 Avoiding sharp angles on Die Model 3 7 4 6 Merging Scan Assistance After the scanning of an individual die has occurred a warning message may appear to indicate that the software needs some manual assistance to merge the die to the impression with the highest accuracy The warning will appear as follows 177 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved gt 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape ScanltRestoration Figure 3 21 Merging Assistance Required Message Once OK is selected the Out of Place die can be seen in relation to the main scan Ej scanltRestoration c 3Shape 39 78211124 _49378211124_ xml File View Help Realign tooth 13 M MM Teeth Scan Registration Please select two corresponding points on the arch and the die KL TTA od e d v Figure 3 22 Selecting Assist Points for Merging A point should then be placed on the newly scanned die with a left mouse click and then a second point should be placed on the correct location of the die the points should be placed in approximately the same area of the die This will allow more accurate merging 178 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved gt 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape 3 7 5 Antagonist Scan Bite Example 3 Un
127. ation of the 3Shape 3D Viewer is not needed for non encrypted systems the viewer will automatically display scan and modelling files For encrypted systems however the location is required in order to inspect encrypted scan and modelling files using the 3D Viewer 204 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved pe 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape Similarly to the other applications we simply click on the Browse button see Figure 5 2 to open up a file tree and locate the application at its installation directory if the default location is not correct The 3D Viewer tab should now have a location if the step was completed successfully 5 3 5 Remote license management server The Remote license management server is 3Shape s central server for administrating communication key files These key files are amongst others used for communication between sites e g when sending orders to a central milling center and to specify the output options for the current site It should never be necessary to change the URL or the server Updated key files can be obtained by pressing Update key file e g if a new connection between the current site and a central milling center is made or if new output options for the current site are defined Remote license management server Remote license management server http Pwww 3shape comy LicenseMan Update key file Figure 5 3 Remote license management serv
128. ative settings Tasks gt gt 3590263702 69 DentalDesigner 4 client points DentalManager 3 client points DentalManager Inbox module 5 client points Refresh Internet update Manual update Eg Figure 5 13 Dongle Update The on screen instructions provide the essential information concerning how to update the dongle and the current dongle details are also displayed If the dongle is replaced update the displayed information by clicking the Refresh button If an internet update is available from the 3Shape update server then the dongle will automatically be updated when clicking the Internet update button Alternatively it can be updated manually by clicking the Manual update button and entering the update code NOTE The number of client points for each of the applications illustrates how many clients can be open at the same time at the site as seen in Figure 5 13 When an application is opened the 3Shape Dongle Service will allocate one client point for that application and when the application is closed the license will be freed once again The client point information is also available in the status page shown in Figure 5 5 the status page shows additional information e g how many points that are currently in use 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark 212 Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E m
129. atories or sites It supports multiple FTP servers for high load central production The functionality requires a properly configured FTP server at the receiving site and correct FTP settings at the sending sites The FTP server does not need to run on the same PC as DentalManager Inbox DentalManager Inbox will fetch the orders on the FTP server using the FTP protocol The customer needs to properly setup the FTP server and create at least one account on the FTP server The account to be used as Inbox account must be setup on the FTP server with full control permissions as data will be created read modified and deleted from the FTP account The Inbox is an add on module and when licensed can be enabled via the Options menu see Figure 1 52 NOTE The availability of the Inbox module can be viewed in the License Information area as described under section 1 2 8 1 Label Printer Settings Options Help Select Add ons and Options Add ons and options Please select the add ons and options that should run an this computer Dental Manager Inbox Module Dental Manager Manufacturing Module Co Cem Figure 1 52 Selecting the Inbox module 44 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved gt 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape After selecting the Inbox module the user will receive a window similar to Figure 1 53 The customer needs to setup the DentalManager Inbox parameter
130. ce or overlay of the crown modelled in the previous steps See Figure 2 142 This connection offset can be modified non uniformly by the 4 parameters in the connection offset tab Lingual Facial Interproximal 1 amp 2 see Figure 2 144 Or simply drawing the offset spline with the mouse on the crown see Figure 132 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved h bs 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual sS5nape 2 145 a b c Figure 2 142 Connection offset set to a 0 1 mm b 0 6mm and c 0 6mm e Check Anatomical coping to define if a normal or an anatomical coping is produced o Anatomical offset defines the anatomical offset of the coping Remove undercuts in the case of an anatomical coping undercuts should usually be removed for a coping and a crown to be produced separately and then to be assembled It is possible to remove undercuts on either the coping or the crown as shown in Figure 2 143 O a b c 133 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual Figure 2 143 Undercuts removal a none b for coping and c for 3Shape d1000 20080730 1203 10080730 1203 xml m Lj File View Help Ex tI CINNE Design iia 7 a anatomical offet 0 60 jm e Onone Ocom Ooi eg e etm s ed do EIS A 3 9 9 H E x oe Z A ED Crown 26
131. ch categorized as either being an implant a screw an interface a base or a scan abutment See the section Preparing CAD parts for implant systems for a detailed description of these parts e An abutment kit is a collection of parts needed to complete the design of the customized abutment A given kit MUST contain exactly one implant one scan abutment and one base and optionally also a screw and or an interface Abutment kits are created by referencing the models added to a given implant system For example in Figure 1 the kit named Abutment kit A is comprised of the parts Implant3 Screw2 etc Multiple abutment kits can reference the same parts and these kits hence allow the user to easily combine the various parts belonging to a given implant system 5 6 5 16 Preparing CAD files for implant systems The table below details the requirements to the CAD files used for customized abutment design All CAD files used for abutment design should be saved in either stl or dcm format 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark 240 Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved gt Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 User Manual 3sha pe Implant There are no specific requirements for the model of the implant This model is used for visualization purposes only Screw There are no specific requirements for the model of the sc
132. cts the round shape of a spherical tool Cement space without Cement space with undercut removal undercut removal Insertion Insertion direction direction Undercut J Ix Figure 2 46 Undercut area Figure 2 47 Undercuts removed 05 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual Cement space brown Extra cement gap e a X Smooth distance ar s V d Distance to margin line Cement gap Marain line Figure 2 48 Cement space surface Figure 2 49 Cement space settings Figure 2 50 Drill compensation 2 5 6 Add remove material Overview The option to add remove smooth material 1s provided in order to improve and refine the shape of the item being modelled This tool is much improved in 2008 version it is faster and has a new option Smooth but the old function can be still used if chosen in Dental System Control Panel The changes can only take place on the external part of the item and not near the margin line The option Smooth can be selected by the user to even out the surface of the restoration see Figure 2 51 Please refer to 2 7 1 Graphics Tables Support for additional information 06 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved asshape 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual p E DentalDesigner WUpc03 3Shape d1000_20080808_1058 d1000_20080808_1058 xm x File view He
133. cube shaped box drawn around the object and containing it The box is actually invisible the only visible parts are its vertices and its edges In DentalDesigner the bounding box is used when placing and modifying pontics The bounding box here is not only containing the pontic but it 1s also actively involved in the placing and modelling process At the eight vertices of the box there are control points they re attached to the box and by moving them the user will be able to deform the box and as the box is attached to the contained pontic the pontic will deform in return The user may think of the bounding box as of the pontic frame box and pontic are tied together and by moving the pontic around the box will move accordingly too 50 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved p 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape 2 3 The DentalDesigner user interface DentalDesigner employs a Microsoft Windows based graphical user interface that allows the user to view the restoration on screen while it is being modelled As shown in Figure 2 1 the user interface comprises the following five toolbars 1 The Main toolbar Located on the top of the screen 2 The Overview toolbar Located on the left side of the screen 3 The Process toolbar Located on the lower left side of the screen 4 The View toolbar Located on the bottom of the screen 5 The Visualization toolbar Located on the right side of the
134. current site it will appear with bold font in the site item list as shown in 28 It is important to choose the current site correctly since this impacts how the output files are created For orders where the manufacturer is This site i e orders for internal production the CAM files are available afterwards in the production data folder as discussed in section 5 3 7 For orders where the manufacturer is a site different from the current site 1 e orders for central remote production the CAM files are not available as they are not being produced locally The Sub site ID can be used by sites having multiple stand alone installations of Dental System see section 0 for stand alone installations These installations all belong to the same sites 1 e they have the same globally unique ID and the Sub site ID can be used to distinguish the different installations It is recommended to provide unique sub site IDs i e 1 2 if more stand alone installations are available The Order number site ID is the ID which is used in the order ID naming template see section 5 3 8 It is recommended to use the globally unique ID for the site which can be copied using the Copy ID button For each site it can be specified if the site Has scanner 3Shape 3D Scanner Has CAD DentalDesigner licenses and Has CAM a manufacturing machine e g milling machine 3D printer or sintering system NOTE O
135. d identification can furthermore be manually edited in the Order Form If Use internal ID for order ID generation is checked then the SiteID may be chosen differently from the actual SiteID please see section 5 6 4 1 HINT The order identification template should be constructed to generate unique identifications The uniqueness is dependent on a lot of factors 1n local production e g number of orders created in a day in an hour etc However the SiteID allocated for each system 1s globally unique hence it is strongly recommended to include the SiteID obtained from the 3Shape server in the naming template 210 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved P 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape 5 3 9 Internet connection If a proxy server is used at the current site then specify the proxy settings Internet connection Lise proxy Proxy type lt none gt Proxy host Proxy port 100 a Proxy username Proxy password ok oo of oo ok a Figure 5 10 Proxy settings 5 3 10 Miscellaneous In the Language combo box we can choose between the available languages for all the applications In the Tooth index system combo box we can choose the type of notation to be displayed in all applications in the Dental System Miscellaneous x Language English Tooth index system FOI Notation Lise Gradient Background Colors rj Gradient Background Color top im Gradient Background Color bottom NE
136. del such as the inside of the screw hole should be deleted to maximize alignment accuracy In general the design of the scan abutment is very critical to achieve accurate fit which 1s particular important for implant bridges 5 6 5 17 Implant system coordinate system constraints When creating the above models it is important to export them in one common coordinate system When handled in this coordinate system the set of models should form a complete assembly 1 e be positioned relative to each other as would be the case when assembled into a complete implant 3Shape recommends that the origin of the common coordinate system 1s placed on the upper resting surface of the implant and centered on the implants vertical axis Furthermore the y axis of the coordinate system should be aligned with this vertical axis and point upwards 1 e away from the implant An example of correct placement is shown in 88 and 89 Figure 5 88 Implant and correct coordinate system 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark 251 Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved P Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 User Manual 3sha pe Base EM Implant Screw Figure 5 89 CAD models of an abutment kit exported in a common coordinate system 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark 252 Phone 45 70 27 26
137. dels Y Scale the pontic to fit neighbours r ica qa P E e le with the given distance between EN th ee Automatic transformation A amp e Adjust to cap neighbours ona e t5 Show peigbbowesdiwctoent i Ra amp Distance to sides mm 0 5 de g g E R Best Adjust to gingival A Pontic gingival offset mm 0 5 amp pst Smooth 0 00 J Ll Pontic 25 o E Stretch 0 00 J c BB toaa pontic mode Place pontic 3 T 7 Default if Dv e Position Rotation angle Figure 2 65 Scale to fit neighbours e is visible The shape of the pontic can also be defined based on the shape of the stump under the pontic When the blue spline typically beneath or at the lower part of the pontic model as shown in Figure 2 64 the pontic can be transformed to fit this spline The spline is positioned a certain distance above the stump specified using the Pontic stump offset value The shape of the spline is defined by the shape of the stump the Smooth value the less the Smooth value is the more will the spline follow the shape of the stump and the Stretch value See Figure 2 66 to Figure 2 69 95 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual Dontic Smooth morph pontic to tomp Manual transformation h UA AERA Pontic collisions P JM ue Adjust to cap neighbours C Show neighbour adjustment lines Distance to sides mm 0 5 fa Sca
138. di0D0 20080901 1149 Importance Mormal w Antagonist Client information Double preparation ZEE Relative position Client John Doe P Contact person Create date 9j 1 2008 Order settings Shipping date 9 1 2008 Patient information Last name Smith Firsk name John Comments Telescope System Wital w Wital 4 3 mm Index Additional Figure 1 13 Order Form window to define a group of abutments NOTE When you want to unite the abutments into the bridge there is no need to select NewGroup option from the menu since the abutments are grouped automatically on selection of the Bridge restoration key To create several groups of abutments with different insertion directions define another set of abutments and select the NewGroup from the Abutment drop down menu for the Group 2 to appear in the list You will be able to set different insertion directions for each group further during the modelling process see 23 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual Order Form Lab information Order settings Scan settings diDD0 20080901 1206 Gojeck type Normal v Anbaganisk Double preparation Relative position Order number Andrea Steven v Client information Operator Importance Client John Doe vw Contact person 9 1 2008 aj 1 2008 J Patient information Smith
139. direction arrow to and fro see Figure 2 171 e Remove undercuts removes undercuts when the checkbox is selected e Fit to Emergence Profile automatically fits the top cap e Deformation mode o The shape of the top cap may be further modified by dragging green control points of the deformation bounding box as shown in Figure 2 170 They control specific areas of the model and edit the neighbouring areas of the model according to the changes made o To set the current position of the control points as a starting position for the next stage of deformation process simply check Reset control points 154 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved P 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape aliii High comi Top cap shape A G Transformation fore makes z free xis Morph the riage of the top cap amp Deform the shape of the top cap e Porph radius 2 hm J T nS Morph nadi ar CJ Defomation CUBS top cap boundanr Information Show top cap ange Sha top cap undercuts Collisions between models Figure 2 169 Morph mode Figure 2 171 Silhouette morph top and surface morph bottom e Edit top cap boundary o To define the boundary of the top cap select Edit top cap boundary This is illustrated in Figure 2 173 The red spline around the abutment cap specifies the maximal bottom boundary of the top cap o Create a spline on the abutment surface see Figure 2 172 left
140. distance from the dies as the physical models See Figure 2 138 Double click the antagonist Figure 2 138 Adjusting the antagonist Validation Validation is the visualization function of the DentalDesigner which evaluates the restoration during the modelling process according to the standards and marks the areas which need correction e Click the PUN Validation button on the Visualization toolbar A small dialog box will appear in the right upper corner of the modelling window see Figure 2 139 Validation A Update Automatically L Applv Material Settings d Thickness 0 60 mm Area 10 00 mm Strength 0 01 SSSS SS 1 Figure 2 139 Validation applied to crowns or 2 e In the modelling window areas marked with green ticks are valid according to the technical standards associated with the type of restoration and its material Areas marked with red exclamation marks are the problem areas that need thorough investigation and appropriate correction 130 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved p 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape e Right click on the red and green marks to see settings of the individual models and compare their measurements with the material specific minimum norms e g thickness area or strength See Figure 2 140 for thickness validation applied to crowns e Comparing either check Apply Material Settings to refer to the material specific mi
141. e None in Figure 2 146 as the design of the crowns is expected to intersect see Figure 2 147 However it is possible to select connectors for crown bridge design with connectors see Figure 2 148 This can both be done in the Order form and during modulation e The design of individual crowns is similar to the design in a single crown or single pontic e After the workflow in individual crowns is completed it is possible to change between the elements crowns and pontics for final adjustment by simply double clicking on the element see Figure 2 147 Along with modelling crown bridges the creation of anatomical coping bridges is possible New in 2008 1 For more details please see section 2 5 8 2 Anatomical copings anatomical coping bridges Gu Png Crown zr amp 3 dy ie c 6 B Bridge mei Index Type None Additional E Figure 2 146 Create an order for the full crown bridge 135 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual lil aniidae c s fiapetsite2 304 95 17 T40 Gl EXT 4T PTSO aml APPT PHOTIC AST Jt File Veew Help ax A 825 2 820 Design ciii Storia transfarmation Ponte callisina Automatic transformation tx Agit bo can reeighbeuns Detanoe b sdas rne ji Pontcgngesoffpet Jmm DS o smetom 7j I bewME FEE
142. e eS E C Model visibility x p 2t f L A Scans ie 2 Sa E v Preparation Morph shape surface and silhouette mD o Automatic transformation Crown degrading Min wall thickness Margin line offset mm Offset angle 1 Extension offset 0 100 lmm Morph distance 4 0 4 0 mm PF ups Figure 2 128 Modify crown 3shape e Model Visibility With a simple mouse click the user can decide either to show the preparation and or the antagonist or only the crown model e Surface measurement This new tool see Figure 2 129 allows the user to measure the distance from the desired point on the preparation to the adjacent tooth see Figure 2 130 the preparation scan Figure 2 131 and the antagonist scan see Figure 2 132 To use this tool the user has to click on it check the box with the desired option and place the cursor on the spot to which the distance is to be measured 123 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved p 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape Wero Bite C Antagonist scan Figure 2 130 Surface measurement Adjacent distan ce to Figure 2 131 Surface measurement Preparation scan 124 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved P 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape Show distance to L Adjacent L1 Preparation sc
143. e 3Shape Dental System which is comprised of five separate applications DentalManager is the main application handling the orders through the production processes and controlling the ScanlItRestoration and DentalDesigner applications The 3Shape DentalManager comes with a standard Order handling part which can be extended with a Manufacturing and Inbox module The following chapter describes these topics 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark 8 Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved p 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape 1 2 Getting Started with DentalManager This chapter deals with the basic order part of the DentalManager We start out by some of the basic features then taking an order through the production process and end up with some optional features Start the application by clicking on the DentalManager desktop shortcut You will be presented to a window similar to Figure 1 1 Options Help 3S D wee External orders come to Inbox rders Inbox 53 14 Order s in Inbox Search ps Order number Creation date Delivery date Client Items Material Status Height ei 8 28 2008 20 8 28 2008 11 1 8 28 2008 Bridge 13 21 Created 8 28 2008 11 1 8 28 2008 Crown 17 16 SS Icons depend on order status
144. e Circular Emm Active Active v MIC n 2 c E m D A z T T lt k e e aj x Connector shape type Facial distance Scale factor Palatal linual dist Shift back E SI Occlusal distance E zi mm Distance to spline a J e e e e Lun Jc Kc 3 J Counter occlusal cist Center stretch Center stretch Center scale E en on ab Center scale Center shift up Ooh oy O a E n GEE DONE o NE O EN 857 NS 0 EN 7 3 Center shift up Center shift back Center shift back Number af points D Cl ah ch og rj ao um Oc NE CT NE C NS co ga Ku KE Kk E Hn Number of points Area Ae Area 9 00 nne Height to width ratio E c c ah Figure 5 69 Connector item data interface parameters Figure 5 70 Connector item data interface parameters for Silhouette connector type shape for Circular and Elliptical connector type shapes The Connector item data common for all kinds of connectors include Data Description Cone oe E Descriptive type of shape Currently three types are supported Silhouette Circular and pe yp Elliptic the connector control splines shapes in 71 72 and 73 illustrates these types Center stretch Stretching of connector see Figure 2 91 Figure 2 92 and Figure 2 93 Center scale Scaling of connector see Figure 2 88 Figure 2 89 and Figure 2 90 Center shift up Shifting of center part of connec
145. e Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape Advanced Settings The properties of the overlay are defined by the parameters specified under Advanced settings Refer to Figure 2 55 for illustrations of these properties Wall thickness is the normal amount of offset 1 e the thickness of the coping See Figure 2 56 Wall height is the distance from the margin line to the borderline marking the beginning of the area where the wall thickness is applied See Figure 2 56 Margin line offset the Offset angle 1 and the Extension offset are all used for defining the overlay shape near the margin line See Figure 2 57 The Lingual band settings define the lingual band of the coping if enabled The effect of the settings 1s illustrated in Figure 2 58 Figure 2 59 Figure 2 60 and Figure 2 61 o When Apply is checked the lingual band is created o Start angle defines the starting angle of the lingual band counting from the user defined annotation in anti clockwise direction o End angle defines the end angle of the lingual band counting from the user defined annotation in a anti clockwise direction o Offset is the offset applied in the lingual band area Overlay l Wall thickness a N i i x N N A Margin line offset Dp f L r j B Offset angle C Extension offset f Margin line mi P a Margin line x y Figure 2 56 Overlay settings Figure 2 57 Overlay
146. e In the export stage the Process toolbar contains a list of the modelled jobs the default name reflects the kind of job as shown in Figure 2 33 The Save all button will save all the restoration models in a folder of your choice this is not the case when you start in DentalManager which we strongly recommend Once the modelling result is saved the modelling window can be closed and a new modelling 1s initialized by pressing the New modelling icon in the Main toolbar or alternatively choose File New HINT To set up an Output Folder go to Dental System Control Panel gt System Settings gt Set Order directory path It is recommended not to use the removable drives e The Orientate model check box which is checked by default will orientate the saved 3D models according to the defined insertion direction If the restoration is produced on a milling machine this check box should generally be checked 74 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual f DentalDesigner WPC81 3Shape Dental System OrdersWMANUAL 1 20070614 1024WANUAL 1 20070614 1024 xml aE File View Help 2B x E qum t s SBS BAE KG rr A 5 Model visibility m Save Scans E v Preperation E A gee et C e ty e E ey e ID e 8 3 a E ot l Seco Browse to choose output folder Defined items
147. e Process toolbar it is possible to manually change the file name or to browse for another file but this is not needed recommended HINT It is recommended simply to press the next button in the Process toolbar Pontic when the Load file dialog box appears as it is not needed recommended to change the default pontic file 2 5 9 2 Pontic Manipulation Overview This step transforms the previously loaded template pontic DentalDesigner provides a default position of the pontic and the user can change the position and the shape of the pontic model using a number of transformations 93 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual DentalDesigner PC81 3Shape Dental System Orders MANUAL_1__20070614_1024 MANUAL_1__20070614_1024 xml Morph radius 2 0 mm g j Morph mode O me Eie View Help e x A iem ale S Li ii Je is Weis M Y Pontic a ER mS Design Manual transformation A 1 Le 4 Rotation mode L Free v axis Reposition spline Auto connector preview p Smooth 0 00 g up e amp e t3 9 3 e Boos Pontic 25 Qj Frish a Load pontic model Place pontic Process e Click the L_ Collisions between models Y Automatic transformation A Adjustto cap neighbours CECO free Rai S C Show neighbour adjustment lines Distance to sides mm
148. e and area of the connector at the marked plane when the points are changed as shown in Figure 2 79 The location of the plane can be changed using the Intersection slider in order to evaluate the connector at different positions See the intersection area slice in Figure 2 88 The Scale slider defines if the connector has a straight shape between the two adjacent elements or 1f it should have a curvature If the connector has curvature the Stretch slider can define the curvature further The effect of scaling and stretching on the connector shape is illustrated in Figure 2 88 to Figure 2 105 e By checking the Show collisions checkbox the candidate connector can be checked for collisions with the delimiting items e Press OK to finish the connector 2 5 10 2 Settings and scaling In the dialogue box shown in Figure 2 80 the user has two options O Settings Here the user can change the shape of the connector according to default presets These default presets can be customized in the Dental System Control Panel Scaling By changing the Center shift back value the user can adjust the scaling of the centre of the connector By adjusting the Center scale value the user can move the centre of the connector back and forward 101 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved gt 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape Model visibi
149. e and choose a directory As mentioned previously the order directory must be a shared network folder if a shared installation is made Data output directories Order directory is currently defined as WUpcos sshape Manufacturing output directory is currently defined as Upc rsy3sshapeyManufacturing v Save DentalDesigner manufacturing output to b material named subdirectories Figure 5 7 Location of orders and manufacturing data NOTE The user running the 3Shape Dental System applications must have write access to both the order data directory and the production data directory The corresponding checkboxes allow to select whether to save the DentalDesigner manufacturing output files to a separate directory and if they are going to be saved in material named subdirectories 5 3 8 Order Form Settings In the Order Form Settings we can decide what information should be visible or editable in the Order Form and we can define an order identification naming template the Order Form is accessible in both DentalManager DentalDesigner and ScanItRestoration For each information item shown in Figure 5 8 we click the Visible check box to make the information visible on the Order Form We click the Enabled check box to make it editable through the Order Form If a whole group of 208 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape information e g
150. e eee ee eee eee eee eee ee ee eee eee 92 De OAT ccc 93 25027 Ponne Manipulador A sao nea A A erases 93 Pen E I S EE mm 99 2 5 10 1 E SS EE E A E E E E EE E 99 2 5 10 2 Seringas and 67 MITUNTER 101 2 5 10 3 Scaling and shifting connectors 0 2 ec ccccccccccceeecececeeeeseseeseeseseseseeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeas 102 DVO MEM CUccIE E 105 LS T IrE M 107 2 5 11 1 Pi ay telescope overlay areeni oriire Er AE EEE E EAr oraa 107 ZSA Opiional componen oaasi T T TO TTE 111 2 5 12 b Lc P M 113 2 9 12 1 BEP AUD TRE EET T TT E 113 2 5 13 BA ND OU aac ect ae cece esa UA MUN dA E E MM MNA EAE an anon Racsene sian sudaseses 115 2 5 54d OA i ERE m m 115 PESE C RU m UU ats sc au tuatencasmnnsantten sig sous E 115 2 5 13 3 IB ruT 118 2 5 14 UTERE T E 120 2 54 1 UE B SITMET m 122 PANE P MEME de QM m 132 2 5 14 3 IE PUNO yi GROG sec eana a e E E a E E T E E E AE 135 2 6 ABUTMENTDESIGNER ADD ON MODULE scccsssscsssssssscsscsescscsscsesssssscsescscsesscsescssssesssssesscssesssscseessesscseesesseeseeee 139 2 6 1 The AbutmentDesigner user interface differences from DentalDesigner s es
151. e set Figure 5 15 DentalManager 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark 213 Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 User Manual 5 5 1 General The general page contains settings regarding the database 3shape 5 5 1 1 Database settings and shared database The database settings can be set up and verified in the General page as shown below Dental System Control Panel General iBl x La Save E Back Navigation Home Dental Manager Tasks Database settings A Details localhost threeshapedental Database settings v This PC Browse Po Default settings Test connection a M Send Options ERP x pco 3shapeYERP Figure 5 16 General Settings The database server can be set manually or by use of the Browse button This PC may be utilized if the database 1s installed on the local PC Notice the database instance name threeshapedental must be added to the server name The Default settings button may be utilized to add the default instance name and the Database name user login and password If the settings are set properly the database connection may be verified with the Test connection button If the connection succeeds a green checkmark will appear in front of the Test connection button Marking the Show limited n
152. ea Empty the Recycle Bin Details Total 2 items Figure 4 3 Add a custom crown library in Dental System Control Panel 4 3 Define a Scan Switch on the scanner and run 3Shape ScanServer Open ScanltLibrary and then click on the button us on the main toolbar see Figure 3 6 A form for specifying the scanning details will pop up as shown in Figure 4 5 On this form the user should decide whether to scan a pontic or a crown and then select the custom library to work with It is noteworthy that those default 3Shape libraries are disabled and they cannot be selected On the Tooth Overview panel select the tooth to scan Those teeth already scanned and those to be scanned are coloured differently see Figure 4 5 If Mirror tooth 1s checked this scan will not only be saved as the selected tooth itself but will also be mirrored and then saved as the mirror tooth ScanltPontic Fille Help a Figure 4 4 Main toolbar 194 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved p 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape Scan Library Default library disabled Library List Please add new libraries to Dental System Control Panel 2 Scanned tooth both 74 Scanned Selected vw Cancel Figure 4 5 Form for specifying the library and the tooth to scan 4 4 Scanning The procedures for scanning a pontic and a crown are described below 4 4 1 Scan pontic 4 4 1 1
153. ed only to the number of teeth in the jaw All copings have amp similar default settings during an operation R Die overlay s Add remove material Figure 2 29 The modelling steps for a coping 12 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 2 4 4 3 Wax up A wax up is modelled in five steps of which the first and last step is optional These are displayed in Figure 2 30 In the first step optional scan artefacts can be removed Secondly the margin line is defined In the third step the die interface 1 e the interface between the die surface and the wax up is constructed with the margin line as a lower border In the fourth step the outer wax up surface is constructed Step 5 optional offers an operation to remove or add small amounts of material on the wax up outer surface A wax up can be part of both a bridge restoration and an individual item The number of wax ups in a bridge is only limited by the number of teeth in the jaw All wax ups have similar default settings during an operation 2 4 4 4 Pontic A pontic is modelled in the two steps displayed in Figure 2 31 In the first step a pontic model is loaded This can be loaded from the DentalDesigner pontic library or a private collection In the second step the pontic is positioned and can be transformed in various ways A pontic will always be part of a bridge restora
154. ed 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual Validation Validation x Validation Update Automatically Update Automatically O Update Automatically Apply Material Settings Apply Material Settings Apply Material Settings Thickness 0 60 mm Thickness 0 60 mm Crown 22 Thickness 0 60 mm Crown 22 Area 10 00 mm j i Area 10 00 mm Coping Area 10 00 mm 1 i Coping Strength 0 01 ML Strength 0 01 i g Strength 0 01 NINKNE d 255 UE Update Walidation allec Update alidation Failed Update f Figure 2 141 Correction of the mistake detected through thickness validation 2 5 14 2 Two layer crown Margin line See chapter 2 5 3 Die interface See chapter 2 5 55 Load crown See chapter 2 5 14 1 Modify crown See chapter 2 5 14 1 Add remove material This step is to add or remove material off the secondary crown Coping This step creates the underlying coping in a two layer crown design It is also possible to make a cement space and drill compensation on the inner part of the crown see chapter 2 5 5 e Advanced settings o Min coping thickness is the wall thickness of a normal coping or in case of an anatomical coping it is its minimum wall thickness o Wall height is the distance from the margin line to the borderline marking the beginning of the area where the wall thickness is applied See Figure 2 56 Connection offset is the offset default uniform where the coping should connect to the interfa
155. ed P JShape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3sha pe The order status can be inspected in the Track and Trace window An example is shown in Figure 1 25 Track and trace lines for the selected order Order number 9999111441389 Expected delivery Comments 5 05 10 2007 15 51 09 08 10 2007 The order has been shipped and closed 05 10 2007 15 24 26 08 10 2007 The order has been accepted for production 05 10 2007 15 23 01 Order received by manufacturer inbox 5 05 10 2007 15 22 20 Order uploaded to Miller s Milling Figure 1 25 Track and Trace Order Accepted Utilize the filter to get an overview of the orders sent for manufacturing see Delivery date Order ID Trace time Expected delivery Trace comments Order number E 05 10 2007 9999111441389 05 10 2007 15 51 09 08 10 2007 The order has been shipped and closed 1452 999981 20071003 05 10 2007 9999111478389 05 10 2007 15 56 05 The order has been REJECTED and will not be produced 0953 99991 20071004 3 Last two days Ux Last week Ux Last two weeks wy By status Created Figure 1 26 Orders Sent to Manufacturing 32 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved p 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape 1 2 6 Closing Once orders have been produced by the manufacturer and shipped back to the end user the order are ready close Closed orders are still accessible through the closed fi
156. element of a six unit bridge For each item in the restoration process the toolbar contains a number of specific operational steps In the following the handling of these steps is described in general in section 2 6 2 4 which introduces the steps associated with designing an abutment The individual operations are described in detail in section 2 6 3 2 6 2 1 Executing the Program See chapter 2 4 1 2 6 2 2 Stage 1 Order The process of defining an order for the customized abutment design is identical to the one used with the other types of restoration such as described in chapter 2 4 2 but demands attention to some additional details in defining the order settings 140 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved p 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape Next to the abutment key in Figure 2 154 you will find menus with different options which are to be selected manually such as type of system and type of kit within this system used in the abutment restoration Crucially the type of kit selected depends fully on the given scan abutment configuration Specifying an implant kit 1 e the scan abutment type to look for will guide the system throughout the scanning process If the implant kit type does not correspond to the type of the scan abutment detected during the scanning process this will result in the system failure to process the order further E Order Form Seles Lab information Order details Sc
157. ell Prismatik wersion 1 0 Premium L16 Premium Posteriars Premium void Prismark w 1 0 Premium Rectangular Figure 5 93 Adding Crown library path list 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark 256 Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved gt Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 User Manual 3sha pe a b Figure 5 94 Connection offset set to a 0 1mm b 0 6mm and c 0 6mm NOTE It is possible to create and use customised crowns but some guidelines regarding the orientation of the models must be followed The 3Shape ScanItPontic application can be used for scanning waxed up customised crowns and adding them to the system for later use in DentalDesigner 5 6 5 20 Bars The Bar item identifies a material bound Bar construction element The Bar item data interface is illustrated in 95 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark 257 Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3shape Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 User Manual P Change ID Rectangle Custom bul coordinate coordinate 1 00 5 00 1 00 0 00 1 00 0 00 1 00 5 00 1 00 amp 3 0 2 4 1 5 1 2 0 60 0 0 6 1 2 1 8 2 43 0 0 5 e D 0 60 i 1 00 0 50 S 0 50 Figure 5 95 Bar item data interface the interface
158. ements be installed on your T DentalDesigner gY computer prior to installing this application Click OK to begin installing these requirements version 2006 1 build 1 2 3 11 ScanItRestorati version 2006 1 build 1 1 2 1 Status Requirement Installing SQL Server 2005 Express SP1 English Dental System Control Panel version 2006 1 build 1 0 1 2 Installing SQL Server 2005 Express SP1 English Figure 5 101 Microsoft SQL server installed as part of DentalManager Other forms are shown as part of the installation do not press Cancel during the installation of the SQL server The installation of the DentalManager itself is done by simply pressing Next on the form shown below the Advanced button allows you to choose database server and authentication method this is generally not recommended except if you are very knowledgeable in database servers iu JS5hape DentalManager InstallShield Wizard Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for 3Shape DentalManager The InstallShield R Wizard will install 35hape Dentalanager on your computer IF you wish En use a different SQL server click Advanced if you wish to continue with default settings click Mex WARNING This program is protected by copyright law and international treaties fAdwanred Back Mexi i Figure 5 102 Installation of the DentalManager 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark 264 Phone 45 70 27 26 2
159. emiScanttLibrany Jf Installed Dongle License Server off Installed DentalManager Order Directory A DentalManager is currently defined as Jf Installed Output Directory VWUPCOS3Shape Dental SystemtiDentalManager Jf Directory set 30 Viewer 3D Viewer is currently defined as WUPCOS SShape Dental Systemi3Shape 3D Viewer Figure 5 2 System Settings NOTE Before the Dental System applications can be run it is mandatory to verify the DentalDesigner location section 5 3 1 ScanItRestoration location section 5 3 2 DentalManager location section 5 3 3 3Shape Dongle Service location section 5 3 6 and the location of the orders and output directories section 5 3 7 Many of these settings will have meaningful values from the installation upgrade of the Dental System 202 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved p 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape NOTE If the 3Shape Dental System is installed as a shared system at the site then it is only possible to choose shared network folders for the different applications and output directories 5 3 1 DentalDesigner Location To allow the Dental System Control Panel to communicate with DentalDesigner the location of DentalDesigner must be known by the Dental System Control Panel The location is normally correct but if changes are required simply click on the Browse button see Figure 5 2 to open up a file tree and locate
160. enmark 221 Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 UerMama 3Shape P Dental System Control Panel Edit Operator John Hanson James Thomson Mat named ID Operators Name dh Add qp Copy x Delete 5 Move up pij Move down Recycle bin eg 1 iter 5 Restore all items oa Empty the Recycle Bin Details Total 3 items Figure 5 23 Added item initial data 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved gt Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 User Manual 3sha pe M Dental System Control Panel Operator PIE td Save Navigation Home Material Settings Operator Recycle bin John Hanson James Thomson Select items Please select one or more items which you either wish to delete or restore Note that if restored an item will be marked as inactive Not named Hide inactive items x DEBE 5 Mayan 2j Move gewr Restore selected item s Delete selected item s Recycle bin e 1 item BS Restore all items g Empty the Recycle Bin Details Total Active Figure 5 24 Deleted item Not named in Recycle bin All items have some common features in the data displayed on the right see Figure 5 21 which are explained be
161. ental System Stand alone Install A Next gt Select this installation if you want ta install 3Shape Dental System on this computer _ 2 Dental System Network Client Select this installation if you want this computer to connect to a Dental System server and run the applications installed on this server Dental System Server Install Select this installation if you want ta install 3Shape Dental System Server on this computer Figure 5 99 Choosing the type of installation Type of installation Description This type of installation is ideal if you want to run all 3Shape Dental System applications from this computer i e the scanner PC The software and order data are stored locally on this computer This type of installation is ideal if you have already installed a Server installation on a computer within the site This installation will simply make desktop links to the software on the Server computer The software and order data are stored on the Server computer on shared network drives that can be seen from the network client installations This type of installation is ideal if you want to run the 3Shape Dental System applications from different computers within the site The software and order data are stored locally on this Server computer but the drives Server are mapped as network drives so they can be seen from the network installations The Stand alone installation is recommended if the software i
162. er 5 3 6 3Shape Dongle Service NOTE Previous versions of the 3Shape Dental System required a dongle with the license information to be available for each license The applications DentalManager and DentalDesigner in the 3Shape Dental System now apply floating licenses This means that it is only necessary with a single dongle containing all the available licenses for the entire site regardless of the number of workstations the new 3Shape Dongle Service which is installed automatically during the upgrade but can be installed on any PC handles all the license requests if one of the applications are started the dongle service allocates one license for the specific application and the license is subsequently released when the application is closed The floating licenses also mean that the applications can be started from any PC in the lab without having to insert the dongle in the PC assuming the software is installed on the PC and that network connectivity is available It is of course still possible to have more dongles each containing the licenses for a single system A new area is available for the new 3Shape Dongle Service making it possible to specify the location of the dongle service the PC on which the dongle service is installed and the dongle is inserted as well as checking the status of the service 3Shape Dongle Service Service status The service is installed and running on this PC Computer name or IP LAPTOP11 Xr
163. er The inbox folder path defines where the orders downloaded from FTP are stored before they are inserted into the DentalManager system This folder is common for all FTP servers The Inbox Auto Accept checkbox defines whether to accept files to inbox automatically NOTE The user running the DentalManager application must have write access to the Inbox folder 5 5 4 FTP Settings Set the FTP settings according to the actual FTP server the URL can be specified either as shown in Figure 5 17 or by using the IP address When this is done the connection may be verified by clicking on Test connection 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark 215 Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 User Manual PJ Dental System ControlPanel 10 x Lal Save E Back Navigation Home Dental Manager 3shape Tasks z Dental System Control Panel f loj x Save E Back Navigation Home Dental Manager Manufacturing Inbox Table My Inbox Change ID Upeo FTF Browse ftp dentallabxyz com 21 anonymous qP Ade Inbox x No TLS Support Test connection 7 Recycle bin e gj Details Total 1 item Figure 5 17 Manufacturing Inbox gt MyInbox FTP Settings setup 5 5 5 Manufacturing DentalManager can assist the order production utilizing the Manufacturing Module suppor
164. er the necessary orientation norms for the minimal values appropriate for the material in use manually e Click the Update button to see the validation updated along with the corrections made Check Update automatically to allow the system to calculate the validation updates automatically HINT During the modelling session it is advisable that the user uses the validation function as frequently as possible to ensure the timely update and correction of problematic areas if any e Problems covered by validation include o Thickness for copings and crowns see Validation chapter 4 12 1 O Area and Strength for connectors Area and strength settings for the connector are interdependent Strength value calculated from the minimal area value defines how resilient the connector is to bending Figure 2 94 illustrates the correction process of the connector area flaw detected through validation in Connector 25 26 One of the options to correct the improper Area and avoid too low value for Strength 1s to modify the shape of the cross section connector spline shown in the View toolbar see chapter 2 5 10 106 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved p 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape Thereby area value ascends from the incorrect 4 04mm Figure 2 94 left to the appropriate value of 7 9mn Figure 2 94 right 2 5 11 Telescope This section describes operations dedicated to the manipulation of a
165. erie 199 5 DENTAL SYS TE VE CONTROL PANE L5ctieeiieeos ed edicto eoe tenssuscceceseestecenecdeaconacstevecvedievesvavteceteccusedeceviseceesenit 201 5 1 lys inueni M ee 201 SEE o duis NR UU Q e T HO 201 5 3 SIUEN PETEN gasses one E N E A E N E TT N E A T 202 5 3 1 Dentalbestener Bole 1316 1 osrin inpe pae eepe taiea nta inaen ia 203 5 3 2 bcanlilsestordton Locat Oii sioe oacsesisoes scooters sanvadeeaadedocasanenotesasessaasaiensansguansaauanes eini ii iaiki n 204 5 3 3 DemalMana er I OCHO Oli sranie inene A err mere A Aa ia eir n iaie ain Ein ini netia ner rr 204 5 3 4 IOON LOCA O rann I E E E OS 204 5 3 5 Remote license management server sssssssssssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeen nennen T aaa 205 5 3 6 Sshape Dongle SOEVIOG csecesasaszavecsasdacsasaseaveansdecingsaseaveadaaeaengaatesuedeasedieasadeduaaaasesuadandeaveasasediouigeeiansiaeeigeticeeioece 205 5 3 7 Data OULDUPCHECCIDERC sees inde pias etui toa tO tRs iade suc quse toutou DINEM NENNEN UR MIN UNUM DN ND 208 5 3 8 Order Form SEINES REPETIT T 208 5 3 9 lnterne Connec ON rpa E a a EET e EEE aai PA ME MEE edis st NOE uum 211 AA ADMINE AATE Nr 211 5 4 1 Dongle Upda eor 212 5 5 PNTE NE NAO Mt E A EE T E ee 213 5 5 1 RS Se E A A E nine acts sts E E E E E E E E
166. ers w Add remove material Surface Parameters w Automatic initial smoothing Sutomatic initial smoothing urFace Outer surface urFace Outer surface Inner surface Inner surface Settings Y Settings Y f Add Remove Smooth Radius 1 88 mm f Add Remove C Smooth Radius 1 88 mm xx xx Color scale Color scale Advanced A Show ori Clear en Advanced A Show ori Clear 5 3 2 ScanltRestoration Location To allow the Dental System Control Panel to communicate with ScanItRestoration the location of the application must be known by the Dental System Control Panel Again we simply click on the Browse button see Figure 5 2 to open up a file tree and locate the application at its installation directory if the default location is not correct The ScanItRestoration tab should now have a location if the step was completed successfully 5 3 3 DentalManager Location To allow the Dental System Control Panel to communicate with DentalManager the location of the application must be known by the Dental System Control Panel Similarly to the other applications we simply click on the Browse button see Figure 5 2 to open up a file tree and locate the application at its installation directory if the default location is not correct The DentalManager tab should now have a location if the step was completed successfully 5 3 4 3D viewer Location The loc
167. es mm 0 5 S Adjust to cap neighbours C Show neighbour adjustment lines Distance to sides mm o5 g Adjust to stomp Pontic stomp offset mm 1 Smooth 0 00 J Scale to fit neighbours Move to manual position Adjust to stomp Pontic stomp offset mm 1 a Smooth 0 00 g Stretch 0 00 jJ Morph to Fit stomp Stretch 0 00 Morph to fit stomp ands unio rem Cue Cim Figure 2 74 Axis rotation mode Pontic Pontic oe lt Manual transformation Manual transformation Rotation mode L Free v Axis Report and draw collisions Morph radius 2 00mm Jg between pontic and preperation Morph mode L1 Ce Rotation mode v Free Axis Morph radius 2 00mm J Morph mode M P Collisions between models 4 Collisions between models E 2f UN 7 Show collisions Collisions Automatic transformation V x Automatic transformation Adjust to cap neighbours 1 C Show neighbour adjustment lines ME Ut i ia C Show neighbour adjustment lines Distance to sides mm 0 5 i Scale to Fit neighbours M E Scale to fit neighbours e to fit neighbours Move to manual position Move to manual position to manual position Adjust to stomp Pontic stomp offset mm 1 Adjust to stomp J Pontic stomp offset mm 1 la Smooth 0 00 Distance to sides mm o5 Smooth 0 00 Stretch 0 00
168. f DentalDesigner is summarized in the Process toolbar 2 3 4 2 Composition Each stage in the modelling process is represented by a button in the Process toolbar As different jobs require different functions to be used the Process toolbar will look different depending on the job The Process toolbar is meant to replicate as much as possible the same steps the technician would be going through when modelling a restoration using traditional techniques It allows the user to go back to previous steps at any time and to move forward again 2 3 4 3 Functioning Each step of the Process toolbar must be completed in order to advance to the subsequent stage In a modelling scenario the user starts the modelling process by pressing the top button that corresponds to the initial step in the modelling stage Upon completion of this step the user proceeds to the next step in line until all steps of the modelling stage have been completed Note depending on the step sometimes advancing to the next step is automatic sometimes it requires the user to push the Next button The currently active step is highlighted with a darker background and an italic label while previously completed steps are displayed bold font The image of the Process toolbar showing the steps involved in modelling a coping is shown in Figure 2 5 A modelling stage can be automatically completed using the Finish button above the modelling step buttons In this case the step
169. gation Home gt Material Settings Abutments Top cap libraries Edit Top cap library Prepared Anatomical ID 3ShapePreparedToptaps Change ID Cylinder Top cap library Ww dj Copy HM velete 5 Moye ur ani Move down Anatomical Recycle bin e No hens 5 Restore all tams gy Emnty the Recycle Bln Cylinder Details Top cap library WWpcds SsShape Dental System Dental System Control Panel library SShape abutments TopCaps SShape Prepared ap Add Total Figure 5 86 Top cap libraries 5 6 5 15 Implant Systems To handle the CAD models related to customized abutments the 3Shape Dental System deals with a number of concepts related to the grouping of these files This grouping 1s shown in 87 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com 248 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 User Manual Implant System 3shape Implants Screws Interfaces Scan ab Implant 1 Screw 1 Interface 1 Scan ab 1 Implant 2 Screw 2 Interface 2 Implant 3 Interface 3 Implant 4 Interface 4 Implant 5 Interface 5 Implant 6 Abutment kit A Figure 5 87 Implant systems and abutment kits in the dental system e The highest level of grouping is an Implant System which typically corresponds to a given implant manufacturer e Each implant system can contain a number of parts ea
170. ge 174 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved b 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape E ScanltRestoration c 3 Shape 1 EE e A FETE ER File View Help 3 Selection EET Tools AI AJ 2 Scanning Arch pn Overview Bee eaec eco E s G G a E Selected Area Figure 3 16 Detail Scan Selection Screen The scan should be rotated to a plan view as shown in the image above The selection tools should then be used to highlight the bridge area The selected area will be highlighted in red Once the desired area has been chosen the Finish command should then be used A detailed scanning of the selected area will now commence Once the detailed scan has finished a more clearly defined 3D model will be displayed on the screen 175 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved shawnee 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape E ScanltRestoration c 3Shape 1 906027351_ 1906027351_ xml Fie View Help MAr TOPE All Elements Selected Gap aSa x Ts Woes for Pontic Gcr Chick Ok to continue or use the KTT E th G a d t a Figure 3 17 Select Dies for Scanning At this stage we now have the option to mark surrounding dies for more detailed scanning Points are placed as shown in Figure 3 17 with the left mouse button The above example shows 2 dies and a pontic that have been selected on the Preparation Line for individual
171. gen K Denmark 237 Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved gt Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 User Manual 3sha pe 5 6 5 6 Primary telescopes The Primary Telescope items identify a material bound primary telescope construction element The Primary Telescope item data interface is illustrated in 53 Change ID Primary telescope crown zr zirkon Al v ie e i Figure 5 53 Primary Telescope item data interface Other than the Material ID the Primary Telescope item data include links to the Cement Space items section 0 Telescope Overlay items section 0 and Optional Component items section 0 5 6 5 7 Telescope overlays The Telescope Overlay items serve as a data connector of sorts between the Primary Telescope items and the Overlay items The Telescope Overlay item data interface is illustrated in 54 Change ID Telescope overlay zr 1 000 i 2 lai L1 Caml rar 3 00 u A oe Figure 5 54 Telescope Overlay item data interface Other than the Material ID the Telescope Overlay item data include telescope specific overlay data and a link to the Overlay items section 0 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark 238 Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008
172. gonist model scan An antagonist model is similar to an antagonist bite The difference is that the former is a cast model The first and second scan the user needs to make are the bridge and antagonist model respectively The third scan is the two arches as a whole The user should mount both arches on the specially designed fixture keeping the preparation arch below the antagonist and the front side of the teeth away from the metal bar of the fixture as shown below It is important to ensure that the objects are not movable on the fixture Then insert it into the scanner with the front side facing the laser Figure 3 42 Mount double arches 190 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved p 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape When the scanning and post processing of the double arches are finished the user will be prompted to align the preparation scan and antagonist scan to the double arches respectively The alignment here is similar to that for wax up bridge scan At last the user will be asked to scan the teeth and finish the rest of the order 191 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved p 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape 4 ScanltLibrary 4 1 Foreword The objective of this chapter is to provide the user with guidance on how to create custom libraries for pontics and crowns using 3Shape ScanltLibrary The relevant settings in Dental System Control Panel are al
173. gure 1 54 Inbox Module options Incoming orders can be inspected with Open or 3D Preview before being accepted The order in our case is accepted and the Accept Selected Orders for Manufacturing dialog 1s brought up as shown in Figure 1 55 NOTE If the program is used to receive files from clients by the manufacturer the system can be set up to accept orders automatically and create CAM files by default If this action is desired the Inbox Auto Accept checkbox Dental System Control Panel has to be checked DSCP gt DentalManager Manufacturing Inbox gt Inbox Auto Accept The default expected delivery date can be changed for more details see chapter 5 5 7 Working Days and it is possible to fill and pass a custom message back to the sender Accept Selected Orders Accept the selected order s for manufacturing Expected delivery date 5 12 2008 w Create COM Files now Pass this message back to the client The order has been accepted For production Figure 1 55 Accept Incoming Order 46 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape This order is now put into the system and can be taken to production Close the order when the processing is finished The customer is able to follow the status of the order utilizing track and trace as described in section 1 2 5 If the order is rejected for some reason the customer gets a note in the list view 1 4 Printing a
174. gure 2 102 When changing the value the current upper control points will be moved up or down to adjust to the new height as visualized in Figure 2 109 compare to Figure 2 108 HINT To obtain the maximum height write an unrealistically large number and the upper control points will be moved as high as possible o When changing the Margin line shape checkbox the upper control points are initialised to have the approximate shape of the margin line when checked see Figure 2 108 or initialized in a plane when not checked see e g Figure 2 106 o To initialize all control points press the Initialize button o For a fast preview of the shape of the final telescope surface press the Preview button The telescope surface will then be visualized as it would look upon completion in grey see Figure 2 95 If a control point or a setting in the dialog box is changed before completion the preview visualization is left Telescope direction M top control points Telescope height Telescope angle Primary telescope Y Close up final surface Lower control points Figure 2 100 Final surface Figure 2 102 Telescope height Primary telescope surface Figure 2 103 Modelling surfaces Figure 2 104 Low smoothing Figure 2 105 High smoothing e Press Apply to generate the complete primary telescope as in Figure 2 95 or click OK to finish 109 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All
175. hapter 5 6 4 1 for more details e Patient information The order s patient information should be inserted here e Comments Any comment related to the order can be added here It will be displayed in DentalDesigner 14 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape e Order settings An order number will automatically be attached to each order The format is defined in the Dental System Control Panel and can easily be customized e Scan Settings The user can scan an antagonist to get a more precise result He can choose between a Model and a Bite or select None if he doesn t want to scan an antagonist In order to design and scan the desired framework in wax the Double preparation box should be checked When the Neighborhood scan box is checked the relative position of the scan 1s captured l 1 Die If 1 die is selected and the Neighbourhood scan box is checked then an accompanying scan is taken also A rough scan of the die and neighbouring teeth is also taken This allows the relative position of the tooth to be considered 2 X Dies With the box checked the neighbouring teeth can always be taken into consideration If for example there is 1 die on the left and also 1 on the right of interest then both these areas should be selected for scanning in the rough relative scan e Teeth numbering information This field displays the numbering index chosen in the Denta
176. hapter and learning to use DentalDesigner the user will come across words and concepts borrowed from the computer graphics and the programming dictionary Concepts like bounding box or control point may be hard to understand to new users and misleading for those who are not familiar with computer graphics and CAD technology In addition as such things don t exist in everyday life and they don t look like things we are used to deal with they do need a proper introduction The purpose of this glossary is to present some of the key concepts which can be harder for the user to grasp Operation Control points Imagine you re holding a piece of clay if you apply pressure on it with your fingers or pull it out the clay will deform consequently This system for manipulation and deforming is not too far from what the one we use in DentalDesigner Imagine that the control points are like magnets and the underlying object which can be a restoration a part of it or a spline can be deformed as it was made of some magnetic clay By moving the control points you will be modifying and deforming the object you re working on Control points look like spheres they come in different size and colours depending on the object they re related to Typically the user can interact with control points by clicking on them and dragging them but in some step the user will interact with them differently as in the margin line definition Lib
177. he shape of the bar for the customized abutment bridge Edit bar il Figure 2 162 Modelling operations in AbutmentDesigner 2 6 3 2 Process VA Remove artefacts See chapter 2 5 2 Emergence profile Overview In this step the shape of an abutment emergence profile is created This process involves two stages definition of the emergence profile marked with a green line and subsequent editing of the sub gingival exit profile shape 148 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual Process 3shape The emergence profile can be designed in two ways O Left clicking on the cast model the user can place control points that are automatically connected to form a gingival spline see Figure 2 163 In order to close the spline the user has to left click again on the initial point placed HINT To determine the location of the first control point place the mouse cursor on the estimate point This will cause the latter to turn yellow if it is the first control point placed Keep the left mouse button pressed while manually drawing a part or a complete gingival spline on the surface of the gum tissue green line The estimate spline will then be automatically levelled and marked with six control points for further editing The resulting estimate of the gingival spline can be changed by O Using the mouse to modify the existing points or by pressing the
178. his depends primarily on the shape e g the depth of the stump 96 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved gt 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape Ponte lt 2 I Aenea transformation UAE E a ee Pe eg Manual transformation e ED a Pontiac collisions Panic colliviand _ a v diem l p Automatic transformation Adjust iy pap nemghleoura Se neighbour siine lines Dibancstngkes mac 05 Scale bo fit neighbours Pise to pearls paratior Adhuast to anger hortx gnges eet ma 0 ie E Seto terpenes p o Me tenana pon fala Li gagner ec Pegga ollzct mi na fal Senn J E Stretch 0 00 J ALA d Figure 2 70 Cut pontic towards gingiva Figure 2 71 Result of cutting towards gingiva NOTE If cutting cannot be applied please check that the pontic selection on the gingiva is made according to 2 4 3 1 and that Pontic gingival offset has a reasonable value 2D Cross section 2D Cross section Figure 2 72 Pontic and gingiva before cutting the pontic Figure 2 73 Pontic and gingiva after cutting the pontic intersects with the gingiva has been cut at a distance of approximately 0 4 mm above the gingiva e The Undo and Redo buttons can be used to cancel or reapply the last changes made e Pressing the Undo AI button deletes all the changes made Manual transformation
179. ied and press the left mouse button The main function of the right mouse button is related to visualization the default setting in DentalDesigner allows the user to use the right button to rotate the models in the 3D view or to pan in the 2D view Configuration can be changed pushing the Rotate view Pan view or Zoom view in the Visualization toolbar Capacities of the right button can change while using different tools and functions and by pushing a combination of keys For instance keeping the ALT keyboard button pressed pushing the right button will make the 3D view pan The preferred method of changing the view 1s to have the Rotate View button in the Visualization toolbar permanently pressed rotates the view when using the right mouse button and to use the mouse wheel to change the pan and the zoom of the view as described in the table below Please refer to chapter 2 7 Dental System Motion Controllers Support fro the additional information Some functions in the Visualization toolbar are available as pure mouse functions as shown in Table 2 2 Mouse button Action Wheel down Pan view When pressed move the mouse in the 3D view to pan Wheel scrolled Zoom view Scroll mouse wheel in the 3D view to zoom in and out Table 2 2 Shortcuts to changing views using mouse Finally it is possible to change the 3D view using keyboard shortcuts While moving the mouse in the 3D view and holding down the right mouse bu
180. ight click The list view can be sorted for a specific column by clicking on the column heading see Figure 1 3 Orders that are not finished before expected delivery date are marked in red 3Shape Dental Manager Orders EIE Options Help GE te 6 Search 0 es Al og Orders Fr By date 3 Today m li ig Last two days E vi Last week Last two weeks irder number a MEID 61 u MEID 61 W d1000 20 gt d1000 20 Create date 28 07 2008 11 28 07 2008 12 29 07 2008 15 29 07 2008 15 29 07 2008 15 Delivery date 28 07 2008 28 07 2008 29 07 2008 29 07 2008 29 07 2008 Status Scanned Created Scanned Scanned Shipping date Manufacturer 28 07 2008 28 07 2008 29 07 2008 29 07 2008 29 07 2008 Default Manufa Default Manufa Default Manufa Default Manufa Default Manufa Items Bridge 11 21 Coping 11 21 Coping 12 22 Coping 12 Coping 22 Material Zirkon Zirkon Zirkon 30 07 2008 10 30 07 2008 Scanned Crown 11 21 Zirkon Ly By status Created New Ctrl N WA di000 20 30 07 2008 11 30 07 2008 Scanned Coping 11 Cro Zirkon checkout Ctrl U W Scanned X Delete Wee Modeled x Closed Select x Advanced R Refresh LJ Other filters Print Checked out Reset us All open 2 Items Selected 3shape g
181. igure 2 136 Deformation Model visibility Scans Preparation Crown C Collision lines X C Cut neighbors Surface measurement X Show distance to C Adjacent C Preparation scan C Antagonist scan n kat Minimum wall thickness E T Ww MT Ra E P Qe Pees DHEJPIE N Ql e Advanced settings The properties of the crown are defined by the parameters specified under advanced settings o Min wall thickness describes the total minimum thickness of the crown and if coping and cement space are present o Margin line offset Offset angle 1 and Extension offset are all used for defining the crown shape next to the margin line This process is similar to the die overlay see chapter 2 5 8 1 Figure 2 57 MN Advanced settings Min wall thickness 0 25 Sy mm Prep line offset 0 100 49 mm Offset angle 1 635 00 ie Extension offset 0 100 4 mm Morph distance E 2 8 R2 Amm o Figure 2 137 Advanced settings tab 129 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved D 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manuat APT o The antagonist scan can be manipulated by double clicking on it New in 2008 1 After doing so there appears the form Adjust Antagonist in the modelling window By moving the scrolling bar to left or right the user can shift the antagonist lower or higher in order to have the scan of the bite at the same
182. ike in DentalDesigner whereby a modelling stage can be automatically completed using the Finish button located above the modelling step buttons the Finish button in AbutmentDesigner accomplishes a series of steps in a stage for a single abutment only In doing so the manual defining of the emergence profile is vital for the following steps to proceed automatically Therefore the modelling stage can be completed using default values for all modelling parameters from the step Emergence profile onwards only y Remove artefacts ri Emergence profile E Add remove material om ule Assembly Figure 2 152 Process toolbar for an abutment bridge HINT In AbutmentDesigner the button Add Remove is not the final step of the modelling stage and is followed by a complex process of Assembly 2 6 2 The modelling process in AbutmentDesigner The modelling process described in chapter 2 4 almost fully applies to the similar workflow in AbutmentDesigner For reference purposes a scheme of the whole modelling process is reported in Figure 2 153 139 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual Directions Finalize di Defined items Bridge Orientate model B A Top cap Add remove material 5 Assembly Figure 2 153 Scheme of the whole modelling process The scheme above describes the modelling process of an abutment as an
183. il support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved gt 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3sha ge 2 4 3 2 Define telescope primary directions cccccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeseesseseseseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 64 2 4 3 3 Define insertion directions use ertt nt or rr dnte pa Fax Ene neat rd uana and d ug RR EA Que Avda ula Rn ERR RR SE Read Penne end 65 2 4 4 By Meli D TS A 1 RN RR RR c 69 D NEMIT OU 71 Lema CO e S A A A A T2 LAEE NR 73 E Aa c uu 73 P MEME tom 74 2 4 5 DIasc d IM e E EE E EEEE EO E A E E A E EA 74 2 4 6 eL E AV OU E E N E E A E I T A E E E E scene 74 2 MOOFCECN C OP LRA TION Tcr M 75 2 5 1 O ads A EA PEET AE EE I EET E EE ETET E ET ETT A E eee 75 25 FRG NOS dE CEU Siac E tesi Estan E eimi sania NEE eMe ph Vei EE AEE TE E E M Me PES Pd IND P rU NES Ra RAE I 25 9 D EVE M E RITTER 78 254 Sa A 2100 0 PIER TOO TNNT o rm 82 255 IBS ULIS DRE RTT 83 2 5 6 PUN Fe WMO Ve TAN AU EI RTT TT Tm 86 294 re e EH 87 2 5 8 CODIIS a E eM Lei 89 Phar MEE OS ERNEUT one eT ene er eee ne ee 89 2 5 8 2 Anatomical copings anatomical coping bridges ssssssssssssssssseeeeneenene enne nenne enne enne 92 2 5 9 ludi ene ne ere rene a nee ee rene e
184. in a unique ID and name e g MyImplant 3 To add parts CAD files to a given implant system select the desired system in box 1 Then press Add button in the relevant list in box 2 and browse the file Import all the desired parts before proceeding to the next step 4 Tocreate abutment kits from the parts of the active implant system click the Add button in box 3 This will bring up a wizard which will guide you through the part selection NOTE In this wizard it is mandatory to select one implant one scan abutment and one base It is however optional to select a screw and an interface Abutment kits without a screw will not be able to generate screw retained abutments in the design phase NOTE The last page of the wizard contains the abutment export options shown below 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark 253 Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved gt Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 User Manual 3sha pe Abutment export options Use implant coordinates Check this option iFaroau want the abutment to be saved in the implant coordinate system Keep base Check this option oF you want to keep the shape of the abutment base Uncheck this option iF ou want to remove the base geometry From the exported abutment Append hole patches Check this option iF yati want to remove the screwy hole From the exported ab
185. inish y Remove artefacts Ww J Load 4 Top cap Order Bridge 36 34 Clinic Default Clinic k Addjremove material Patient AD new scans Wy UL ww 3 3 3mwmx 3 3 OAOO3 O01 O 4 4 Assembly Figure 2 164 Mouse editing of exit profile 151 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved p 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape l Load Open pontic file abutment top cap 36 Select model Prepared Anatomical File name Figure 2 165 The open pontic file abutment top cap dialog Overview In this step we load a template abutment top cap from the library The file name is automatically defined based on the current tooth This step simply loads the model while the next step in the modelling process transforms the selected top cap model to the desired location and shape Process Load e Click the button on the Process toolbar automatically pressed when loading the file the first time A dialog box will appear By default there are three types of caps available prepared anatomical and cylinder e AbutmentDesigner automatically selects a template top cap corresponding to the index of the tooth being modelled Simply click OK to confirm the selection HINT It is recommended simply to press the next button in the Process toolbar Top cap when the Load dialog box appears as it is not needed recommended to change
186. ion i Chent inen EN Meighbahood scan a Contact person Order dete 2007 11 27 EU Order settings Patient information q qd Las name First heme Visualisation Toolbar Comments Teeth Overview Map Q E Toe agar eo LU qd d L Index 37 Additionat Figure 3 6 Main ScanItRestoration Interface Screen Although the most frequently used and important item from Figure 3 6 is the Order Form the other features will now be described Details about the Order Form can be found in the DentalManager chapter 3 5 2 Visualization Toolbar The Visualization Toolbar located in the right side of the screen is used to transform and change the visual appearance of the object on the screen The buttons of the Visualization Toolbar are presented below Item Visualization 166 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape E H 2 These buttons switch the view between different predefined angles E EN T Pan View When selected right click and drag to pan the view hs Rotate View When selected right click and drag to rotate the view Col Zoom In Out When selected right click and drag to zoom in and out Zoom All Adjusts the zoom so that all objects are displayed on screen 3 5 3 Using the Mouse and the Keyboard Most of the steps in the scanning software require user inputs through the mouse These user inputs are m
187. ions Help ERLA el 9 mes A agi orders Order number Creation date Delivery date Client Items Material Status Height P By date di000 20 7 30 2008 10 5 7 30 2008 Crown 11 21 Zirkon Created 3 odd diO000 20 7 30 2008 11 2 7 30 2008 Coping 11 Cro Zirkon Scanned J i oday A zu WA di000 20 8 1 2008 3 21 8 1 2008 Crown 26 Zirkon Scanned T Last two days 3 di000 20 8 4 2008 2 14 8 4 2008 T Scanned w Last week m uN hi Ctrl N Jj uy Lasttwo weeks 3 P Ctrl M by By status E Check In Ctrl H Created i ae Refresh Scanned Select we Modeled oe z Advanced l a u Print Reset 3 Other filters ES Checked out uM All open gt 1 Items Selected ber diO00 20080804 1414 ent Creation date 8 4 2008 Material Zirkon iate 8 4 2008 Bridge 11 21 ManufacturerDefault1 Receive date 8 4 2008 acturer Default Manufacturer 3shape gt Figure 1 29 Check In Orders 1 2 7 2 Search The Search component can be utilized to locate specific orders Click on the arrow right to the magnifying glass to switch search criteria as illustrated below 35 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved p 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape Order barcode IS re By date Order number Create date Delivery date date Manufacturer amp Order number IB 3Shape Den
188. irection A Set direction Figure 2 158 Scan abutments and insertion direction estimate e During scanning scan abutments are placed on a gypsum model to perform accurate scanning The scanner detects the implant cavity depth and the insertion direction by matching the scan abutments placed on the gypsum model with the correspondent virtual scan abutments saved as in STL file format linked to a particular implant kit Therefore in our case the programme automatically provides an estimate of the abutment top cap insertion direction The current restoration will be rotated into a position proposing this direction as the user point of view HINT Implant kits are imported and modified in the Dental System Control Panel e The user can always rotate the restoration and press the Set direction button to redefine the current point of view as the insertion direction e If the user chooses to work with a couple or more groups of abutments with different insertion directions the program will automatically ask him her to set the insertion direction for each group separately one by one E g if in the order there has been defined two groups of abutments the program will ask to set insertion direction for one group and then for another See Figure 2 159 and Figure 2 160 145 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved pe 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3sha pe Implant Direction Implant Direction Implant
189. is provided in order to improve and refine the design of the bar according to the anatomical shapes of the preparation surface and various stylistic and functional demands of the restoration type Process a Edit bar e The button appears automatically once the Assembly stage in the design process of the last abutment in the bridge has been completed This will cause a dialog box to appear where the majority of the advanced design settings are located e Apart from the modifications applied from the dialog box the user may adjust the shape of the bar manually 158 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved sshape 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual The green spline on the top of the restoration defined by a number of blue control points marks the upper border of the restoration It 1s intended to help the user to conveniently locate the changes applied visually Rotate the model accordingly to see its horizontal dimensions Move the blue control points to raise or to lower the active section of the bar see Figure 2 176 left Rotate the model accordingly to see its vertical dimensions Move the blue control points to move the active section of the bar closer to or further from the buccal area of the mouth see Figure 2 176 right Check Use straight lines in the main dialogue box to create a geometrically rigid angular shape of the bar Click Reposition the spline in the grey View toolbar
190. isfied with the design job done it is always possible to Reset current spline or Reset all splines to default settings Click OK when the emergence profile of the customised abutment is defined to move to the following modelling step 149 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual File View Help 87 25820 Abutment emergence profile E Scans Gingival Spline amp C Preperation Gingival spline offset 0 mm Abutment kit C Scan abutment Ec melan Interface x C Base j L1 Screw e e amp Design w 4099 FEG P Be we E Abutment 36 V Finish S Remove artefacts w a Load 4 Top cap Order Bridge 36 34 a Clinic Default Clinic 7 Addjremove material Dak ADheWiH S a 5 Assembly rrr 3shape gt io Rotation angle Figure 2 163 Gingival spline estimate 150 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual Ej DentalDesigner c 3Shape d1000_20071029_1158 SR_AD new scans d1000_20071029_ 1158 SR_AD new scans xml E File View Help 5 389 25820 Abutment emergence profile t F ae Gingival Spline Gingival spline offset 0 ie mm Clear spline ss Edit exit profile shape Cee Ce w Reset current spline we Reset all splines ea Abutment 36 V F
191. istance to spline deis c OH e d We T n ap Bar11 25 Default Clinic Figure 5 96 Abutment bar illustratinitem data interface the interface varies for different Bar shape types 5 6 5 21 Margin line The Margin line item specifies the default parameter settings used for detecting the margin lines Please note that one and only one Margin line item exists and that this is not material dependent The Margin line item data interface is illustrated in 97 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark 250 Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved gt Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 User Manual 3sha pe Edit Margin line Mame Margin line Point distance mim Angle o fad j Maintain angle Smoothing Figure 5 97 Margin line item data interface The Margin item specific data include Data Description Point distance Defines the distance between neighboring points on the margin line Defines an angle used for automatic detection of the margin line Increasing this angle will Angle make the automatically detected margin line crawl up on the die and vice versa for decreasing values A weighting factor used for automatic detection of the margin line Low values will place the Maintain angle automatically detected ma
192. it Bridge A bite scan can be used for visualisation purposes A scan of the bite mounted on the cast can be used in modelling software e g DentalDesigner to assist with the sizing of coping and other projects Once an order has been defined on the order form the scan process can then commence 3 5 1 Preparing the Bite The Bite model should be created so that it covers the specific teeth that face each other Once the bite has been created then there is usually a need to cut off excess material so that the scanning is quicker Untrimmed bite model Figure 3 23 LEFT Untrimmed bite model RIGHT Trimmed bite model The images above show the bite mounted on the cast The image on the left shows the untrimmed bite model This can be seen from the fact that the bite material has deformed and is pushing over the side of the cast A blade should be taken over the sides of the bite model to clean it up This will reduce scanning time Care should be taken not to cut through the area where the teeth have made an impression on the bite 3 5 2 Commence Scanning Once OK on the Order Form has been clicked on the user will be prompted to insert the Cast with the Bite mounted 179 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved h ps 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual ssnape Insert Bite including corresponding arch Bar f mee eger ee d 999 i Figure 3 24 LEFT Insert Bi
193. ive an optional component can be placed on the side of the telescope Step six offers an operation to remove or add small amounts of material on the outer telescope surface A telescope restoration can contain as many single telescopes as the number of teeth in the individual jaw All individual telescopes have similar default settings during an operation r 7 A Margin line at E Primary telescope overlay p i Optional component Add remove material Figure 2 28 The modelling steps for a telescope 1 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved p 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape 2 4 4 2 Coping A coping is modelled in five steps of which the first and the last step are optional These are displayed in Figure 2 29 COPING In the first step optional scan artefacts can be removed In the second step the margin line is defined Thirdly the die interface i e the interface between the die S surface and the coping can be constructed with the margin line as a lower border In the fourth step the die overlay outer coping surface is constructed n Margin line Step five optional offers an operation to remove or add small amounts of material on the outer coping surface l A Die interface A coping can be both part of a bridge restoration as well as an individual item The number of copings in a bridge 1s limit
194. ject accordingly When all the steps for a specific element have been activated AbutmentDesigner will automatically switch to the next element in the job that is not yet finished HINT Throughout the modelling the Overview toolbar can be used to hide show specific elements Simply right click on an element or the scan model and choose its state The Next button in the info toolbar is enabled as soon as the user has completed all the elements for all the jobs An abutment 1s modelled in six steps of which the first and the fifth steps are optional They are displayed in Figure 2 161 l Remove artefacts skipped by default artefacts present on the scanned file are removed Emergence profile the exit profile shape is defined Load the top cap model of the future abutment is selected Top cap the top cap is edited Add remove material removes or adds material on the outer coping surface Assembly completes the assembly process for the parts of the customised abutment defining various screw settings NOTE An abutment can be both part of a bridge restoration as well as an individual item The number of abutments in a bridge is limited only by the number of teeth in the jaw All abutments have similar default settings during an operation NOTE In case of an abutment bridge the modelling process is accomplished with an additional step Edit bar discussed below which designs the output shape of the b
195. l it is most advisable to use either of the following options o For an overview of how the abutment top cap changes under the influence of the changes made to its inner structure use the ordinary view in the modelling window from the top Note that the view is strictly defined by the drill hole radius and 1s thus functionally limited see Figure 2 175 left column o For a detailed picture of the inner structure of the top cap use 2D cross section option in Visualization toolbar see Figure 2 175 centre column o Fora schematic image of the abutment kit profile use 2D slice view in the View toolbar see Figure 2 175 right column View from the top 2D cross section 2D slice 2D Slice Vertical screw offset 0 mm Extra drill hole radius 0 mm Position Rotation angle D Slice Vertical screw offset 3 mm Extra drill hole radius 0 mm Position Measure Rotation angle C Area 157 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 2D Slice Vertical screw offset 0 mm Position o p Measure Extra drill hole radius 0 5 mm Rotation angle 5 L Area Figure 2 175 Visual interpretations of changes within assembly settings e The Thickness map is a useful option to have a clear idea about the thickness of the complete abutment top cap structure A similar tool can be found in advanced option
196. l System 2008 1 User Manual DentalDesigner PC81 3Shape Dental System OrdersWANUAL 1 20070614 1024WANUAL 1 20070614 1024 xml SAX Eile View Help ax a52g0 Margin line Model visibility Design j inn E ix Scans g Margin line 1 C Preperation nez go Antagonist e Show undercut gee Show points ey z R a gt Advanced A m e oo e Point distance 0 500 f mm yy c Angle ofi esl 3 AX SJ CU e t5 Maintain angle CY A 0 e 3 Smoothing A e Qy Show angle graphics E A e a poppe Fh Finish v S Remove artefacts A Margin line A Die interface R Die overlay a ES Addjremove material 0 Figure 2 39 Points and undercut area visualized The points are coloured red when they are in undercut areas this amount of points in the undercut area is rarely observed 80 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual File View Help ax B 52 20 So recae J cem J Show undercut Show points Design Qs Next oe 1 SUUM Advanced e Point distance mm e Angle 2B e oclB h 9 2 fa e amp Maintain angle 2 amp Smoothing e Li aR Ef Tes eu E ERE UT C Fivish J Remove artefacts Q Margin ine Rem 0 A Die interface ea A Die overlay Addjremove material Order Bridge 24 26 Clinic Default Clinic
197. l System Control Panel The default system is the FDI notation When the cursor 1s moved over a tooth the index number will appear Selected teeth will be circled in red e Restoration keys The restoration key provides information about the nature of restoration to be performed on a specific tooth 1 2 2 2 Defining an Order When processing an order it is important to specify the operations To select a tooth left click on it It will be circled in red the relevant operations can be added with a click on one of the restoration keys The Dental System software allows working in layers You can easily start with a coping and add a crown for example 15 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved p 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape Order Form Lab information Order settings Scan settings Operator Andrea Steven v Order number d10D0 20080901 1122 Era Importance Normal w Antagonist Client information Double preparation F Client ohnDoe iw Doe v Neighborhood scan Contact person i Create date of ajzoos af 1 2008 Order settings Shipping date 9j 1 2008 Patient information Last name smith First name John Comments d 5 amp e Circular amp mm TTA Index Additional Figure 1 6 Selecting teeth Once the relevant restoration is selected the tooth will change color according to the chosen restoration key next to the teeth
198. l bound coping construction element The Coping item data interface is illustrated in 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved gt Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 User Manual 3sha pe Edit Coping ID Coping Change ID arre Coping Zr Material zirkon Color Ad Cement spaces Coping overlays Figure 5 51 Coping item data interface Other than the Material ID the Coping item data includes links to the Cement Space items section 0 and Coping Overlay items section 0 5 6 5 5 Coping overlays The Coping Overlay items serve as a data connector of sorts between the Coping items and the Overlay items The Coping Overlay item data interface is illustrated in 52 Edit Coping overlay ID Copingoverlay 1 Change ID Name Coping overlay zr BEZNE Firkon Wall height 1 000 pud rr Anatomical id Remove undercut Overlays Figure 5 52 Coping Overlay item data interface Other than the Material ID the Coping Overlay item data include coping specific overlay data and a link to the Overlay items section 0 The only Coping Overlay item specific data 1s Data Description Wall height See Figure 2 56 and Figure 2 55 in section 0 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenha
199. l file needs to be as following Name John Silver ZIP Code 12000 External ID 010001 Country AU Invoice Name John Silver Phone 800 502 0958 Address 1 12 Ocean Road Fax 800 502 0959 Address 2 14 Maple Street E mail johnsilver example au City Sydney WWW www johnsilver com State NSW Contact person John Silver 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark 225 Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved gt Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 User Manual 3sha pe gt Dental System Control Panel Site e x bal Save o Back Navigation Home gt Material Settings Tasks Change ID Get from server 000485 Site All Smiles Dental Care Links Nicholas Feldman DDS Stuffy S Ortho Lab LLC 123 Dental A amp Family Dentistry 4b Dental Ace Dental Care Aesthetic Family Dentistry All Smiles Dental Care Bradford Allen DDS Larry Allen DDS Richard Allen DDS Jonathan Almy DDS American Family Dr Ra FTP port 21 amp Show Clinics Sh b No TLS Support v Show Labs Show Manufacturers Test connection 4726 E Thomas Rd Recycle bin 5 d 85018 Re i g Empty the Recycle Bin Phoenix AZ Details Not specified v Total 23 items 602 840 2330 602 840 2379 All Smiles Dental Care Figure 5 28 Site item data interface In the 3
200. l selections defined Ignore scanning selections Figure 2 157 Correct placement of selections on gingiva See Process chapter 3 3 1 for further details Define insertion directions Overview This stage serves the purpose of defining the insertion direction this is a direction to insert the top cap of the customized abutment on top of the implant Please refer to the paragraph 2 4 3 2 for an explanation of the user interface for insertion direction The insertion direction is set by the system without further intervention from the user However the user will be able to modify the insertion direction in order to have it best fitting the design NOTE The insertion direction is not to be confused with the implant direction marked with olive font The latter depends fully on the implant insertion direction parallel to the screw position found by scanning the scan abutment and NOT the top cap insertion direction Therefore only the insertion direction marked with the light blue font can and should be specified by the dental technician Process e Thet button in the Process toolbar is automatically clicked when leaving the selections step Then i images of scan abutments with default shapes appear automatically to visually mark the insertion direction for the user 144 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved p 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape Insertion direction Insertion d
201. le to Fit neighbours Move to manual position Adjust to stomp Pontic stomp offset mm 1 3 el Smooth 0 00 j Stretch 0 00 J Morph to fit stomp Figure 2 66 Pontic stump offset Pontic Smooth morph pontic to stomp i Pontic collisions Y eS ee Automatic transformation Adjust to cap neighbours C Show neighbour adjustment lines Distance to sides mm 0 5 ge Scale to fit neighbours Move to manual position Adjust to stomp Pontic stomp offset mm 1 3 el Smooth 0 80 J D f Sen J res Core uon Apply Figure 2 68 Stretch surface lines Manual transformation t See mn a Pontic collisions de J E Automatic transformation a Adjust to cap neighbours C Show neighbour adjustment lines Distancetosidesjmm los Scale to fit neighbours Move to manual position Adjust to stomp Pontic stomp offset mm 1 3 lal Smooth 0 80 J Stretch 0 00 Morph to Fit stomp Cele Apply Adjust to cap neighbours C Show neighbour adjustment lines Scale to Fit neighbours Move to manual position Adjust to stomp Pontic stomp offset mm 1 3 Smooth 0 80 Stretch 0 50 Morph to Fit stomp Distance to sides mm os B ete Conte ine a sshape Smooth morph pontic to stomp Smooth morph pontic to tomp Figure 2 69 Morph pontic to stump NOTE The blue spline is not always present T
202. lit into five separate stages as illustrated in Figure 2 7 Upon completion of one stage the user is allowed to proceed to the next or return to the previous stage The name of the current stage and the buttons to skip to the subsequent or the previous stages are displayed in Figure 2 9 Stage 1 Order E Stage 2 Directions Stage 3 Design nj c Stage 4 Finalize Stage 5 Save e SO Figure 2 4 The modelling process Ed DentalDesigner File View Help r jna Ji 5 M UE ins M Figure 2 5 Current stage 50 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved h ps 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual ssnhnape At this stage a deeper and more organic view of the DentalDesigner workflow can be premature For reference purposes a scheme of the whole modelling process is reported in Figure 2 11 Finalize trea e ee v amp e e d ee a 009 FERE S X os i rs lis BI FA Insertion direction 8 lt Orientate model Die overlay Add remove material Figure 2 6 Scheme of the whole modelling process A scheme of the modelling process for a coping as an element of a 3 unit bridge is represented above For each item in the restoration the Process toolbar contains a number of specific operational steps In the following the handlings of these steps are described in general Sections 3 4 2 to 3 4 6 introduce the steps a
203. lity Scans n v Preperation A v Auto connector preview ban KT Center shift back Center scale a o0 j o8 Facial view Ay Connector 44 JM 45 O Finish Intersection g gar Sein Length 1 54 mm Connector Collisions v Order Bridge 43 45 Clinic Default Clinic j 9 AMEND 007 S i e uahnhnaom M G s E s 1 Lingual Facial ip Figure 2 80 Settings and scaling 2 5 10 3 Scaling and shifting connectors In the dialogue box shown in Figure 2 81 the user can use the mouse to o Change the centre scaling move the mouse left and right o Move the connector s center back and forward drag the mouse up and down o Change the centre stretching move the mouse left and the right O Move the connector s center up and down drag the mouse up and down 102 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual fl DentalDesigner C 3shapeV20070529 1452120070529 1452 xml eg File View Help ax 389 G 8g 6 Design Settings Manipulate shape Graphic values EX E Center shift back Center scale m x va CMT TT J a LT TOI pia Pumpe Connector 44 i 45 Finish ireapsection a EE Length 1 86 mm 4 Edit connector Connector Collisions Y Lex JL Drder Bridge 43 4 Clinic Default Clinic Lingual Facial Figure 2 81 Scaling and
204. ll thickness 0 25 f mm Prep line offset 0 100 e mm Offset angle 1 65 00 e Extension offset 0 100 mm Morph distance 2 8 f amp l 2 5 ie mm I ES M n S Crown 26 v Finish S Remove artefacts A Margin line R Die interface Order Crown 26 Clinic Kiev A Load crown JU Addjremove material A Coping Add remove material Figure 2 135 Morph a x Ri 4 Ww 4 7 o Deformation This allows the user to deform the crown by dragging the control points or control lines The principle is similar to the lactice modifier present in generic CAD software 128 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual El DentalDesigner Upc03 3Shape d1000_20080926_1507 d1000_20080926_1507 xml File View Help pa B Ga Shape edit mode Reset control points v 4 ay SS d A EUR er Automatic transformation A amp e Crown degrading J Advanced settings dy e 3 Min wall thickness 0 25 famm Prep line offset 0 100 il mm pug Offset angle 1 65 00 e Extension offset 0 100 fmm Morph distance 2 8 i mm Crown 26 Finish S Remove artefacts A Margin line R Die interface Order Crown 26 Clinic Kiev Au Load crown 2D Slice A i x Add remove material R Coping Add remove material F
205. lling an Order in DentalDesigner 30 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 1 2 5 Manufacturing sshape Next step for Modelled orders are manufacturing Start by selecting Send to Manufacturer or double click the order see Figure 1 23 3Shape Dental Manager Sie Options Help lelsizIsjejajr o e Search og Orders Order number Create date iz d u di000 20 21 07 2008 14 Ay By date di1000 20 21 07 2008 16 i di000 20 28 07 2008 11 3 Today m I Last two days T diOO0 20 28 07 2008 12 p v di000 20 29 07 2008 15 di000 20 30 07 2008 10 wi Last week ad Last two weeks by By status Created Wi d1000_20 30 07 2008 11 u j W Scanned e Modelled Ww Sent EVA Closed T Other filters Checked out a All open Delivery date Status Shipping date Manufacturer Items 21 07 2008 Created 21 07 2008 Default Manufa 21 07 2008 Scanned 21 07 2008 Default Manufa Crown 11 28 07 2008 Scanned 28 07 2008 Default Manufa Bridge 11 21 28 07 2008 Created 28 07 2008 Default Manufa Coping 11 21 29 07 2008 Modelled 29 07 2008 30 07 2008 Created 30 07 2008 lt Send to Manufacturer Ctri T 30 07 2008 New Ctrl 30 07 2008 Scanned E w Modify Ctrl M oe Re Model 4 Checkout Ctrl U Ctrl Alt O R 3D Preview Ctrl
206. loring eo oo Undercut area Measure undercuts Y y Selections Edit paints x a Lx Insertion direction Order Bridge 24 26 Clinic Default Clinic Position C Measure Rotation angle C Area Figure 2 24 Insertion direction estimate Model visibility x Scans C Preperation C Antagonist i Gg z 3 amp 2 DE Vx Sa 3shape gt Two arrows display the calculated direction as shown in Figure 2 25 The red shading indicates undercut areas for the given insertion direction Undercuts are areas that need compensation during the modelling process and it is important that the area above the margin line is not part of the undercut area The undercut can be measured as shown in Figure 2 26 where the total undercut area as well as the depth of the undercuts 1s visualized e The user can always rotate the die and press the Set direction button to redefine the current point of view as the insertion direction In addition the user can press the Edit optimization button to change the points again and the optimisation can always be calculated again by pressing the Optimize direction button e The Next button in the Info toolbar is enabled as soon as the insertion direction is estimated Pressing this button will take the user to the next stage of the modelling process 68 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved a gt gt 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User
207. lose up of Figure 2 48 Extra cement gap See Figure 2 49 close up of Figure 2 48 Distance to margin line See Figure 2 49 close up of Figure 2 48 Smooth distance See Figure 2 49 close up of Figure 2 48 Cement space brown rem Extra cement gap Smooth distance Drill compensation r Distance to margin line Cement gap Margin line Figure 5 40 Cement space surface Figure 5 41 Cement space settings Figure 5 42 Drill compensation 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark 234 Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 User Manual a Cement space no undercut removal Cement space undercut removal Insertion direction Insertion direction Undercul gt ix Figure 5 43 Undercut area Figure 5 44 Removed undercuts Further details and explanation of the use of the Cement Space item data can be found in the DentalDesigner chapter 5 6 5 3 Overlays The Overlay items contain data for specifying the general outer surface of a coping wax up and telescope The Overlay item data interface is illustrated in 37 The Overlay items are linked to from Coping Overlay items section 0 Telescope Overlay items Eg section 0 and Wax up Overlay items section 0 Other than the Material ID the Overlay ite
208. low Please note that the Operator group only contains these common features whereas most other groups also have other group specific features Feature Description 29 66 The item ID is unique among all items in the list 1 e the item group both Active not active and items currently in the Recycle bin The ID can be changed by clicking the Manual update button to the right of the ID The user will then be prompted with the dialog ID on Figure 5 25 As when adding a new item the dialog will only accept a unique ID NOTE It is strongly recommended to introduce meaningful IDs when adding new items so that these IDs are not changed at a later time Changing IDs of items already used in existing orders may cause problems The Name is a regular text string not necessary unique that acts as the visual identification of an item wherever the item appears in the Dental System applications it will be identified by its Name The Name is also displayed in the item list and Recycle bin item list in the Control Panel A new item Name is initialized as Not named but this Name should be changed immediately HINT When naming an item it 1s always a good idea to follow some naming conventions that make it clear to what group an item belongs and what its role in that particular group is In the case of e g names of countries or materials it is pretty obvious but
209. lp 8 X tI CRANES Add remove material Design T E Surface Parameters ayy Outer surface Inner surface Add Remove Smooth tool LE RH Advanced 4 Je wwe ees S Remove artefacts Re IPRC A Margin line A Die interface Load crown 5 Modify crown F Figure 2 51 Add Remove Smooth tool 2 5 7 Process e Click the button in the Process toolbar A dialog box will appear e Choose the Add option button to add material Alternatively choose Remove or Smooth e Use the left mouse button to spray the bulges away from the surface The more a given area is sprayed the more material will be added or removed e The radius of the spray tool is changed using the Radius slide bar e The amount of spray is adjusted using the Amplitude slide bar e Checking the Automatic checkmark in the Colour scale settings panel auto adjusts the limits of the colour scale to the depth range of added and removed material see Figure 2 52 Un checking Automatic allows the user to specify an acceptable value 1 e a range of depth changes allowed by the designer as well as a maximum depth value specifying the range of the colour scale 87 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape a Color scale C Automatic Acceptable value 0 01 mm g gt Maximum value 1 50 mm he gt Figure 2 52
210. lso be manually defined in the user interface Settings A a ee be Wall thickness 0 60 ie mm amp e Wax up offset 0 00 e i mm te e B cutoffs 2 00 imm Bo AAS cy e 9 Margin line offset 0 250 ie mm 2 e H Offset angle 1 65 01 e t e e amp Extension offset 0 200 mm i i Lingual band ray l Co m Apply oO te gt x Start angle 12008 A End angle 240 f psi Offset 1 00 l mm I we Man C vA Remove artefacts A Margin line A Die interface Q Wax up Addjremove material e P 2 E s Order W as up Zr Wax up Zr gt Clinic Default Clinic Figure 2 117 The wax up step offsetting the wax up inwards with the Advanced settings shown Process e Click the J button in the Process toolbar A dialog box will appear e Selecting an element in the Type drop down box chooses the settings used for creating the outside of the wax up 113 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved n gt 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 UserMamal 38hape Advanced Settings The advanced settings define the shape of the overlay The effects of changing these settings are shown in Figure 2 118 and Figure 2 119 e The Wall thickness is the minimal wall thickness allowed This parameter is useful to ensure a minimum thickness when offsetting the wax up inwards e The Wax up offset Figure 2 118
211. lter as shown below 3Shape Dental Manager See Orders l Options Help SIE lo e m x ag o ders Order number Create date Delivery date Shipping date Manufacturer Pe By date w di000_20 21 07 2008 16 21 07 2008 21 07 2008 Default Manufa Crown 11 3 Tod Q d1000 20 28 07 2008 11 28 07 2008 28 07 2008 Default Manufa Bridge 11 21 Zirkon P ay l r jj Last two days o3 Last week T Last two weeks Ly By status Created B Scanned Closed orders Figure 1 27 Closed Orders 1 2 Features The features described below are not mandatory for standard production but optional extensions such as e Check out order for offline production e Search e Select orders with common values e Generate CAM output e Export orders e Print order list amp label e Reset order e Views 33 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 1 2 7 1 Check Out Order Orders are allowed to be modelled on a computer which is not part of the Dental System e g on a laptop which is brought home Note this requires an additional dongle Orders need to be properly exported from the Dental System database and sshape later re imported Select the desired orders and select Check out in the right click popup menu as shown on Figure 1 28 3Shape Dental Manager Orders Options Help o 9
212. m Set the transparency of the objects the user will be working with For instance the user might want to see both coping and its die at the same time This function allows the user to make the coping transparent Define the 2D cross section in order to have the best visualization in the 2D window for explanation see below Switch to custom rotation and panning mode allowing the user to rotate and move the object freely on the screen The buttons in the Visualization toolbar are presented in Table 2 4 HINT Rotating and panning objects freely can lead even the most expert users to non optimal and confusing visualizations objects can easily end up being oddly rotated or only partially visible this is normal when operating CAD software as DentalDesigner The view buttons on top of the Visualization bar are mostly meant to help the user taking the objects back to a more optimal visualization We suggest you to spend some extra time figuring out how the view buttons work this will speed up your future work and make it more comfortable 54 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual Item B 8 a T ke DN 9 3shape Action View The view buttons allow the user to switch between a number of predefined viewpoints Placement overview Enables the user to control the alignment of the crowns and the pontics in a customized crown bridge HINT Please
213. m specific data include Data Description The distance between the outer overlay and inner cement space surface See Figure 2 56 teens close up from Figure 2 55 Margin line offset Offset distance A illustrated in Figure 2 57 close up from Figure 2 55 Offset angle Angle B illustrated in Figure 2 57 close up from Figure 2 55 Extension offset Offset distance C illustrated in Figure 2 57 close up from Figure 2 55 Apply lingual band When checked apply lingual bands Lingual band start angle Angle illustrated in 50 Lingual band end angle Angle illustrated in 50 Lingual band offset Offset distance illustrated in Figure 2 59 close up from Figure 2 58 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark 235 Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved gt Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 User Manual 3sha pe Wall thickness A Margin line offset B Offset angle C Extenson offset Margin line Margin line Figure 5 47 Overlay settings Lingual band Close up gt offeat Figure 5 48 Overlay with lingual band Figure 5 49 Lingual band offset Lingual band N Figure 5 50 Lingual band angles overlay seen from below Further details and explanation of the use of the Overlay item data can be found in the DentalDesigner chapter 5 6 5 4 Copings The Coping items identify a materia
214. ment that is currently active Show backface Toggles visibility of model backfaces i e whether its inside is visible Show annotations Toggles visibility of annotations on the 3D model Material shaders Marks the 3D model parts with the corresponding colors imitating the surface of the real restoration materials Rotate view When selected right click and drag to rotate the view see section 2 2 55 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved p 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape m Pan view When selected right click and drag to pan the view see section 2 2 I Cy m Zoom view When selected right click and drag to zoom in and out see section 2 2 Surface measurement Allows the user to measure the distance from the desired point on the preparation to the adjacent tooth the preparation scan and antagonist scan Table 2 4 Functions in the Visualization toolbar 2 3 3 Overview toolbar The Overview toolbar shown in Figure 2 3 is designed to quickly provide information on the current job comprising it with various workflow control functions It enables An overview of the modelling jobs specified in the order form as well as information on the currently active job highlighted by green dots Information specified with names of various jobs and tooth names FDI is the default notation used which can be changed in the Control Panel can be acquired by pausing
215. mised components but some guidelines must be followed Please contact 3Shape for further information 5 6 5 9 Wax ups and Wax up bridges The Wax up items identify a material bound wax up construction element The Wax up item data interface 1s illustrated in 62 Edit Waxup ID Waxtpni Change ID Name Material Color Cement spaces Waxup overlays Figure 5 62 Wax up item data interface Other than the Material ID the Wax up item data include links to the Cement Space items section 0 and the Wax up Overlay items section 0 NOTE The Wax up item is also used for Wax up bridges In the Order Form a wax up bridge is created as a set of individual wax ups hence the description in secion 0 also goes for wax up bridges 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark 240 Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved gt Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 User Manual 3sha pe 5 6 5 10 Wax up overlays The Wax up Overlay items serves as a sort of data connector between the Wax up items and the Overlay items The Wax up Overlay item data interface is illustrated on 63 Edit Waxup overlay ID WaxupOverlay 1 Change ID RERS Waxup overlay zr Material x ikot Cut offset 2 000 mm Waxup offset 0 000 fad rrirn Overlays Figure 5 63 Wax up Overlay item data i
216. n Smith Client information Client J ohn Doe Contact person L Create date 3j 26 2008 Shipping date 9 26 2008 L Patient information Last name First name Comments Order details sshape Scan settings Order number diOO00 20080926 1343 DJECE typ Model Importance Normal v Antagonist None Order details ease d d Index Additional Double preparation Neighborhood scan C Figure 2 126 Two layer crown order form model an anatomical normal coping beneath the full crown The first steps in the crown modelling until the Die interface step are identical to the ones in the coping modelling process From the Load Crown step onwards the user will come across two new steps 121 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved p 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3sha pe 2 5 14 1 Full Crown Margin line For this step see section 2 5 3 Die interface For this step see section 2 5 55 Load crown During the crown annotation step see Figure 2 127 the user is able to e Choose a crown shape from a library the user can load different crown models out of an extended library New in 2008 1 To do this left click on the menu and scroll down In addition the user can browse the hard drive and pick an arbitrary model from a WRML and DCM file
217. n item data interface 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com 255 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved gt Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 User Manual 3sha pe Most of the Cement space and Overlay settings for the crowns are already described in 0 and 0 respectively The Crown item specific data include Data Description Library name The name of the crown library as it will be displayed in the Order Form Library path The path where the library of crowns are located List containing all crown libraries with a green check mark defining the default library for this Library paths list crown item Adding new library path lists 1s done by pressing Add and filling in the form shown in 93 Is the uniform offset where the coping should connect to the interface or overlay of the crown Negative values connect to the interface and positive values to the overlay of the crown see Figure 2 142 This is only used for two layer designs coping under a crown Margin line connection offset Crown degrading Pd iin value for degrading of the library crown Zero signifies no degrading of the library Change path Change path Please select a valid name C23 ease select a valid path Select Path Panelilibrany y aShape crownms c2 Library paths list 35hape Standard Slidew
218. n of the use of the Telescope Overlay item data can be found in the DentalDesigner chapter 5 6 5 8 Optional components The Optional Component items contain a file path to a component to be attached on the owner The Optional Component item data interface is illustrated on 61 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved gt Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 User Manual 3sha pe Edit Optional component Optianalcamponent 1 Change ID Optional component Control PanelMbrary3sShapeoptianal camponentsitelescape Thickness 1 stl Figure 5 61 Optional Component item data interface The Optional Component items can only be accessed from a Primary Telescope item since only primary telescope construction elements can have components attached on the sides Furthermore it is the only item group accessible from another item that doesn t have to have an item checked When unchecked the primary telescope specified will not allow any components to be attached in DentalDesigner The Optional Component item data include a path to a closed model in the STL format The default Optional Component item is linked to a 3Shape library component The path can be changed by clicking on the path name which will open a file browser It is possible to create and use custo
219. nd Reading Labels 1 4 1 Label Printing in DentalManager The DentalManager has an in built function to print labels Apart from the other administrative information the labels display order number and barcode The print dialogue is called from the Options menu of the main program window by selecting Options gt Label Printer Settings see Figure 1 56 Frinter Mame Status Type E ES O X Where Comment Options Help Print range C All Closed 0 0 mm Figure 1 56 Printing Labels 3 elem w Properties SUPC2T Samsung SC 416 Seres Ready Samsung SCE 4415 Seres USBOO1 Copies Number of copies 1 1 pi Bo Re ollate 97 eae ah 47 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved h ps 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual ssnape The function should work with any printer The images below illustrate examples of labels printed on Bixolon SRP 770 II and Seiko Smart Label Printer 420 accordingly 1 4 2 Barcode Reading When properly installed any numeric barcode reader should be able to read barcodes generated by the DentalManager Most barcode readers look like shown on the images below 48 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved p 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape 2 DentalDesigner 2 1 Foreword DentalDesigner is an advanced software package for designing high precision customized restorations from 3D scan
220. nd and receive 5 7 4 2 Sender preconfigured Inbox add on module not required In the case the manufacturing site ftp has been preconfigured by the software provider requires special Site Administration Connection tool provided by 3Shape the ftp information can be downloaded using the Control panel material settings Import sites from server functionality see 115 The downloaded manufacturer can then be applied directly when creating the order Note encrypted systems will always be preconfigured 5 7 4 3 Sender manual configuration Inbox add on module not required In the case the manufacturer has to be configured manually create a new site by pressing Add Then fill in the name and ftp information as shown in 115 The ftp information is typically the same as applied by the manufacturer see 114 Always validate the configuration by pressing the test connection button Potential errors are described in The created manufacturer can then be applied directly when creating the order 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com 270 WIELAND Dental Technik GmbH amp Co KG Schwenninger StraBe 13 75179 Pforzheim Germany Fon 49 72 31 37 05 0 Fax 49 72 31 35 79 59 www wieland international com info wieland international com International Representations WIELAND Dental Technik is worldwide repre sented Find your contact
221. ndle the whole list of steps for a specific element some are optional and others have valid default settings e The user can freely switch between the steps in the Process toolbar for a specific element and DentalDesigner will automatically rebuild the object accordingly e When all the steps for a specific element are completed DentalDesigner will automatically switch to the next element in the job that is not yet finished 70 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape HINT Throughout the modelling the Overview toolbar can be used to hide show specific elements Simply right click on an element or the scan model and choose its state e The Next button in the Info toolbar is enabled as soon as the user has completed all the elements for all the jobs 2 4 4 1 Telescope A telescope is modelled in six steps of which the first and the last two steps are optional These are displayed in Figure 2 28 In the first step optional scan artefacts can be removed In the second step the margin line is defined Thirdly the die interface i e the interface between the die surface and the telescope can be constructed with the margin line as a lower border In the fourth step the primary telescope surface is constructed based on the telescope primary direction defined in stage 2 see section 2 4 3 2 Step five and six are both optional In step f
222. ne defined by the user to be the lower boundary of the surface to be measured and in case of a die it will typically be located on the upper part of the section For reference see the tools in the View toolbar in Table 2 5 Operation Rotate view Rotates the 3D view around the current element Auto Rotates the 3D view 360 degrees around the current element Slice rotation angle Changes the rotation angle for the 2D intersection plane affects the information presented in the left 2D view Slice position Changes the centre of the 2D intersection plane affects the information presented in the left 2D view 58 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved a p 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape Area When enabled the 2D views display areas of closed 2D intersection regions only when the mouse is over a closed 2D intersection region Measure When enabled two points can be defined for an intersection in the 2D views and the distance between the points will be calculated Table 2 5 Functions in the View toolbar 2 4 The Modelling Process This chapter describes the process of modelling dental restorations in DentalDesigner In chapter 2 1 the Main toolbar has been presented each of its functions will be described in details here As already mentioned the Main toolbar is organized according to the DentalDesigner workflow system The modelling process is sp
223. ner Points in dongle 1 Points in use 0 Points available 1 Client Price Connections Dental Designer 1 DentalManager Points in dongle 3 Points in use 1 Points available 2 Client Price Connections Dental Manager 1 192 168 168 100 Check for dongle updates Show server log file Local time 2007 10 10 13 06 00 UTC time 2007 10 10 11 06 00 J Local intranet amp 10095 Figure 1 40 License Information 43 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 1 2 8 2 Reporting Bugs 3shape 3Shape is depending on your feedback in order to solve problems and improve the software Please use the built in Send Report Bug functionally if a problem should occur If a critical error arises the Bug Report seen in Figure l 41automatically appears 1 3 Inbox Module Report bug The bug report contains the active order a screenshot and the information below Note that you should not expect a direct reply to this error report Please write in English if possible Customer inFormation Name Someone E mail address someone mail com Bug description Please describe the problem I encountered a problem when Steps to reproduce 1 Click on eii 3 vis Send bug report Bug ID 2007 10 10 11 11 18 15CE Figure 1 41 Reporting Bugs The DentalManager Inbox module allows production facilities to receive orders from remote labor
224. ng two central control points These are coloured light green and light red and a green line between the points indicates the orientation of the connector The latter can be changed using the following methods O Press the Edit button for either the start or end point This brings the connector step to the edit mode where clicking with the mouse on the large central point and dragging it to the desired location can easily change the orientation By pressing the Edit button again the standard view comes back In the standard view the central control points can be dragged and the orientation thereby changed The length of the connector the distance between the two central control points is shown at the bottom of the dialog box e The external shape of the connector can be modified using the following methods available from the Manipulate shape panel O Press the Edit button for either the start or end point This brings the connector step to the edit mode where clicking the mouse on the blue points and dragging it to the desired location can easily change the shape In the standard view the blue points can also be moved by clicking with the mouse and dragging HINT If the connector cannot be completed when pressing OK or Apply then try to edit the blue points lying closest to the contours borders on the adjacent elements The right 2D view in the View toolbar updates the intersection shap
225. ngual direction Places the center of the connector control splines a certain distance vertically from the Distance to spline Placement overview spline The default value 0 named Auto in DentalDesigner ignores the placement How high the initial shape of both the connector control splines should be according to the Height to width ratio width This creates an elliptical effect as illustrated on 73 where the Height to width ratio is set to 1 2 Connector control spline Connector control spline Figure 5 71 Silhouette shaped Figure 5 72 Circular shaped Figure 5 73 Elliptical shaped connector connector connector 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark 244 Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved gt Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 User Manual 3sha pe Connector Area slice Connector scaling mid up Connector scaling mid down Figure 5 74 Connector Figure 5 75 Low scale factor Figure 5 76 High scale factor Connector stretching down Connector stretching Connector stretching up Figure 5 77 Low stretch factor Figure 5 78 Neutral stretch factor Figure 5 79 High stretch factor Figure 5 80 Neutral Center shift up Figure 5 81 Added Center shift up Elliptical connector shape type Elliptical connector shape type 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Cope
226. nhagen K Denmark 245 Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 User Manual Figure 5 82 Neutral Center shift back Figure 5 83 Increased Center shift back Elliptical connector shape type Elliptical connector shape type Further details and explanation of the use of the Connector item data can be found in the DentalDesigner chapter NOTE The new Silhouette connector type from 71 shapes itself according to the contour of the neighboring elements and this new connector type combined with the extended number of shifting and scaling factors is considered extremly powerful making automatic modelling of connectors feasible Therefore it is strongly recommended to move the default provided Silhouette connector item or another Silhouette connector item up as the first element in the Connector item list as shown in 84 in order to make it the default choice in the Order Form Lonnector Silhouette Circular amp mm Circular Smm Elliptical amp rnrm Elliptical Sram Mone Hide inactive iterns ap Add E Topy x Delete E Ive LI j ae Figure 5 84 Move Silhouette connector item as default first 1tem in the list 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark 246 Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Sh
227. nimum norms pre set in Dental System Control Panel or un check Apply Material Settings and enter the necessary orientation norms for the minimal values appropriate for the material in use manually e Click the Update button to see the validation updated along with the corrections made Check Update automatically to allow the system to calculate the validation updates automatically HINT During the modelling session it is advisable that the user uses the validation function as frequently as possible to ensure the timely update and correction of problematic areas if any e Problems covered by validation include o Thickness for copings and crowns Figure 2 141 illustrates the correction process of the thickness flaw detected through validation in Coping 22 One of the options to correct this mistake is to use the Add remove material function see chapter 2 5 6 Thereby thickness value ascends from the incorrect 0 40mm Figure 2 141 left to the appropriate minimum of 0 60mm Figure 2 141 O Area and Strength for connectors see chapter 2 5 10 4 Validation Update Automatically Apply Material Settings Type Coping Thickness 0 60 mm Number 22 Area 10 00 mm Thinkness 0 40 mm Strength 0 01 1 alidation Failed Update Walidation Accepted Crown 22 Crown 23 Coping Figure 2 140 Validation Failed and accepted crown models 131 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserv
228. nly sites where Has CAM is checked can be chosen in the Order Form as manufacturers Has scanner Has CAD Has CAM Figure 5 30 Site item IDs NOTE For each site it 1s possible to specify FTP settings as shown in Figure 5 31 These settings should be specified for central manufacturing sites in the list and the settings will allow DentalManager to easily transfer orders from the current site to the central manufacturing site Please note that if the current site This site also acts as a central manufacturing site receiving orders from other sites through DentalManager then the Manufacturing Inbox Module must be available and the FTP settings for the current site must be specified in the Inbox page see section 5 5 2 and not on this Site item page NOTE The FTP must be provided by the central manufacturing site They may be verified by the Test connection button if the connection succeeds a green checkmark will appear as shown in Figure 5 31 Please note that the FTP user needs to have read and write access to the FTP server read access is required in order to obtain track and trace information for order status Also different FTP servers have different requirements regarding the FTP directories some requires e g V at the end of the directory whereas others don t in case of problems please discuss this with the central manufacturing site 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark 227 Phone
229. nnen 160 2 12 Space Ball Suppi BRENT T T 161 3 SCANITRESTORATION RR 162 3 1 POREWOR D oraa E E 162 S UNPACKING AND INSTALLA TION per ane nae nn n eea E a a E E T eee 162 3 21 Installing Third Party Computer Peripherals or Software ssssssenneenmenn 162 3 3 Br EIS Wo a 162 3 3 How to Parron a C ADEALEOPI oec cu i oietdio odor au ue EE OdeRaNU dod RUNS de Horn UR SU taney P ERN E 162 RINGO T 164 3 4 1 Transportation of the D250 Scanner cccccccsssssseeeseseneseseseeesenesencaeaesensesessensnsessseessnsnsnsnseescceeeeeeeeeeseenes 164 3 4 2 Transportation of the D640 Scanner cccccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecessEsEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE EH 164 3 5 SCANITRESTORATION USER INTERFACE sige sec setecstacce soot nrinig oa TAE E E aniio 166 3 5 1 E EE E EE E E AEA I A AA EA OE A ET 166 33 2 Visualization orato RR Em 166 3 5 3 Using the Mouse and the Keyboard cccccccccccceccceeeceeeececeeceeceeeeeececeseceeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 167 3 5 4 Tee Overview IMAP MNT 167 3 5 5 General eie e THERE OE T 168 Ss MES iride od nn ee E re cre ee 169 s OW iore 169 3 7 1 Using The Interlace Plate cciana eo e iaa aoii
230. ntary scan of wax up bridge for better coverage iat Figure 3 38 Dialogue for confirming a supplementary scan 188 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved a gt gt 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape Figure 3 39 Mount wax up bridge for a supplementary scan It should be noted that a very noisy or poorly covered scan often means that the wax up bridge has moved during scanning or the coating painting is bad In this case the scanning quality will not be improved by making a supplementary scan When the scanning and post processing is finished the user will be prompted to align the two scans by selecting two corresponding points one on each model on flat surfaces Figure 3 40 Align two wax up bridge scans 3 point alignment can be used in some rare cases where the normal alignment method becomes unstable see figure below If this method is used three points should be given on each model for alignment 189 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved p 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape Alignment Select six corresponding points three on each model k 3 point alignment Figure 3 41 3 point alignment When the two scans have been aligned and combined the user will be asked to align the wax up bridge to the arch At last the user should simply follow the instructions and scan the teeth defined in the order one by one 3 7 10 Anta
231. nterface Other than the Material ID the Wax up Overlay item data include wax up specific overlay data and a link to the Overlay items section 0 The Wax up Overlay item specific data include The offset distance from the margin line where the wax up scan is cut and a smooth surface Cut offset from the cut to the margin line automatically generated In 64 1s illustrated a low Cut offset and in 65 a higher Cut offset The wax up surface offset outwards positive or inwards negative In 66 is illustrated a wax up with Wax up offset value 0 and in 67 with a negative Wax up offset value Wax up offset Cut offset Cut offset Prep line Prep line Figure 5 64 Cut offset low Figure 5 65 Cut offset high 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark 241 Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved gt Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 User Manual SPOT Waxup offset inwards Prep line Prep line Figure 5 66 Wax up no offset Figure 5 67 Wax up offset inwards Further details and explanation of the use of the Wax up Overlay item data can be found in the DentalDesigner chapter 5 6 5 11 Pontics The Pontic items specify a collection of pontics to be used as construction elements The Pontic item data interface is illustrated in 68 Edit Pontic
232. nual 3shape gt Coping Telescope Wax up cy Die interface create the inner Die interlace surface of the item Add remove material add and remove material on the item surface Coping Telescope Wax up Add remove material Die overlay create the outer surface Coping n Die overlay of the coping Load pontic model load pontic Pontic model from library Place pontic manipulate pontic Pontic position and shape Add connector create bridge Connector connector Primary Primary telescope overlay create Telescope telescope overlay the outer surface of the telescope Optional components attach Telescope component to the telescope surface Wax up create the outer surface of Wax up the wax up Figure 2 34 Modelling operations in DentalDesigner 16 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved gt 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape 2 5 2 Remove artefacts Overview The aim of this step is to remove artefacts arising from the scanning process Ir AATA EAE A PC81 3Shape Dental Svstem Orders MAN File View Help iBix B 25 20 Remove artefacts Settings A J Tools m A BN m Advanced LI a Paint Radius a Coping 24 V Fik mm S Remove artefacts Jw A Margin line E A Die interface oe A Die overlay Add remove material 5
233. o different possibilities to interact with control points moving them via keyboard input or placing them via mouse input Both ways will be explained below in paragraph 2 4 3 3 NOTE Unlike any other control points in any other step of the DentalDesigner modelling the control points which define the margin line cannot be moved using the mouse Therefore clicking on them and dragging them will produce no result x Insertion direction The button in the Process toolbar is automatically clicked when leaving the selections step or the primary telescope direction step for telescope crowns An initial estimate of the margin line is required for each of the coping wax up and telescope items in the restoration DentalDesigner automatically provides these estimates by placing eight points on the margin line for each of the dies The user can change these estimates using either of the following options o Use the keyboard to change the position of the points Press the Keyboard button to select the keyboard editing method as shown in points This is the default method which is recommended if the initial points are placed close to the margin line Press the RIGHT and LEFT keys on the keyboard to change between points each point is displayed as green ball on red line on a die Press the UP and DOWN keys on the keyboard to move the points up and down HINT If a point needs to be moved a long distance press
234. o cee ance DIM Nu e dc ea aaa 190 As SCANITLIBRARY 192 4 1 POE O e E E E E 192 4 2 ADD LIBRARY IN DENTAL SYSTEM CONTROL PANEL civissasssttnsannoecnbeanoedamvemereabaiinnddamadsiicndsexoetoexoawedsbecinodonwsddoecaoeenente 192 4 2 1 Add ponnc IDrary sosisini i a a Ea Ea a N i DS E Eaei 192 4 2 2 Add crown 0 10 120 a ZR RETRO RR Em 192 o MEDIA IP eec E 194 2 HE INI com 195 4 4 1 STEPON O T 195 Zo LT Moun Oma Inset DONLEG cs peo qSRP E E tuspsqiesbdp i dun UiptMr E Ede Bea UE 195 4 4 1 2 Supplementary scan COP MONA cas ccisncnatuinsleanteatnsinsateidacnis URN I dEQUn unc SexesbuE d dus uDUTRUe um uns une Td xU DUE oM DE PN CE lN US 196 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark 5 Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved gt 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3sha ge LN MEM VIERTE ses 197 4 4 2 PC AMC ROW ui M O 198 4421 Scanning aoi RE m 198 ao SPA MEME S PER Room 198 a A Add MODED TS Ree HN 199 25 NORD AS CAN patiss
235. oating licenses The Has CAM checkbox defines if the site has the possibility to create manufacturing files In this case your lab has this possibility since Has CAM is checked 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark 270 Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved gt Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 User Manual 3sha pe bY Dental System Control Panel Site td Save OQ Back Navigation Home Material Settings Tasks Edit Site Import site s from server D Change ID Get from server External ID for interfacing with third party software Clinic ABC CPH lab Name Central milling center Central milling center Jespers This site Active Michaels This site Has scanner Hide inactive items E Has CADI wp Add Has CAM dp Copy x Delete FTP IP address URL name 192 xxx XXX XXX Bj Move up By Move down FTP port 21 P S Y Recycle bin FTP password e No rems FTP directory Inbox 5 Restore all berm w the Recvele Bln F TF SRCU SACRES No TLS Support Test connection TY s Figure 5 110 The site page of a central manufacturing center If you want to send orders to a central manufacturing center for production then you need to add the central manufacturing center as a site to the list In 110 the settings for a central milling center is shown Here you need to pay attention to the
236. od final fit and hence this step is one of the most important steps in the entire modelling process This step only marks the margin line The actual cutting of the die is performed in the next step of the modelling e Initially DentalDesigner automatically places a number of points on the margin line of the model as shown in Figure 2 40 with a red line spline connecting the points The margin line is extracted based on the red pencil margin line approach which simulates the manual approach used by many technicians The red pencil approach applies the following in the automatic calculation of the margin line o The eight initial points from the insertion direction step see chapter 2 4 3 3 These eight points are initially set in transparent as shown in Figure 2 22 as soon as the margin line is manually adjusted the eight points are no longer visualized also they are not shown during rotation of the model o The Angle Maintain angle and Smoothing variables and the Margin direction are all described below in Advanced settings e The points on the spline can be visualized using the Show points button and the undercut areas see Figure 2 39 for description of undercuts can be visualized using the Show undercut button Figure 2 40 shows the points and the undercut areas The points turn red when they are in undercut areas in order to clearly draw the user s attention on this potential problem WARNIN
237. offset see Chapter 4 10 1 o Margin line offset see Chapter 4 10 1 118 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3shape gt 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual p o Offset angle 1 see Chapter 4 10 1 o Extension offset see Chapter 4 10 1 For more information on the Lingual band frame under the Advanced settings please see Chapter 4 6 Using the Select model setting the user can switch between the individual models of the wax up bridge To do this just click on the left or right arrow e Step 4 Add Remove material See Chapter 4 5 DentalDesiener WPC81 3Shape D File View Help X 389 325820 Waxup bridge Design Settings Next Type WaxupoverlayZr iv ee Bridge offset U t Min wall thickness 0 60 i v Preperation C wax up bridge C wax up g 0 60 amp a e Smoothing oog REA 9 e Cut offset 0 37 I mm OQ e amp Margin line offset 9 250 I mm P t a Offset angle 1 65 01 B gt Extension offset 0 200 3 mm EA amp S Lingual band eeo Apply o A Start angle 120 BP E End angle 240 8 I Offset 100 f mm Wax up 14 Fash del Select model A Jf Remove artefacts Waxup 14 eene omae A Margin line Apply A Die interface Ar Wax up bridge Addjremove material Order Bridge 17 14 Clinic Default Clinic WEE UO OMS 2D slice vie
238. omplished to obtain the desired scan output 3 7 4 1 Overview Scan To create a 3D image that will be used to model a dental bridge various scans must be taken The first scan to be acquired is that of the Full Arch or Cast model The cast should be fixed with its flat bottom side on to the black scanning interface plate similar to Figure 3 10 It is very important that the object is secured and cannot move during scanning Both should then be placed into the scanner The plate will click into the correct position inside the scanner with the help of the fixing spheres and markers on the plate T he scanner doors should now be closed 3 7 4 2 Start Scan To start the overview scan the Next button in the scanning application should be clicked on This will present the user with an instruction of what is to be scanned 173 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved a gt 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 UserManal APC Insert Arch c X ov Ce t ee eee egge coo ot Figure 3 15 First scan instruction The scan achieved at this stage will be a rough general scan of the arch cast This scan provides an overview of the whole cast for selection purposes The desired bridge site area can now be selected and improved in scan quality 3 7 4 3 Selecting Detailed Scan Area As there is now have a general image of the cast the Selection Tools should now be used to highlight the site area for the brid
239. on 3E Figure 2 17 Open modelling button 62 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual Order Explorer Create Date Delivery Date Shipping Date Receive Date _ oo i 200g 05 00 05 05 POOG 08 05 lt IN6 O5 05 a ee j en mm Em um cms oem cm m 2008 08 04 200S 0S 04 005 06 04 00 08 04 Sotorders by Show orders a creation date Browse oc Cancel Within 2 weeks Within 30 days All Figure 2 18 Dental Order Explorer 2 4 3 Stage 2 Directions 2 4 3 1 Selections Overview The Selections step serves two purposes Specifying what part of the scan preparation which tooth or die or gingiva corresponds to what restoration job as you can see in Figure 2 19 there is a blue control point see the Glossary for the definition of control point for each of the two dies and there is also a control point on the gingiva On top of each control point stands a label showing what job corresponds to which part of the scan and what its index number is FDI notation as default For instance on top of the left control point you can read Coping 26 meaning that on top of the underlying die the user 1s supposed to model a coping and the coping is defined as 26 according to the FDI notation system Approximately identifying the margin line or preparation line currently DentalDesigne
240. ot share associated data with other contruction elements please see section 0 for a discussion of shared data for the other contruction elements Naturally the Crown items use similar items as a coping i e Cement spaces and Overlays but they are not shared with any other elements as described above This means that all settings for a Crown item can be displayed on a single page as seen in 92 where the data interface 1s shown 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark 254 Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 User Manual Edit Crown ID Mame Material ID Color Library name Library path Library paths list Cement space Name Remove undercuts Cement gap Extra cement gap Distance to preperation line Smooth distance Overlay Mame Wall thickness Preperation line offset Offset angle Extension offset Margin line connection offset Crown degrading 3shape Crowrn1 3shape Standard Crown library path Worcs Shape Dental Systeri Dental System Contra Panellibrary 3sha pe Crowns Standard 35hape Standard C Glidewell Prismatik versio J cis cen Premium L16 F Premium Posteriors C Premium Ovoid Prismark s 1 0 CementSpace crown zr mm mm mm mm Overlay crown zr mm mm mm mm o Figure 5 92 Crow
241. p Cap Edit top cap boundary Remove Undercuts V Fit to Emergence Profile Fit Top Cap O Deformation O Edit top cap boundary Information Information Show top cap angle Show top cap angle Show top cap undercuts Show top cap undercuts Collisions between models Y Figure 2 167 Free rotation mode Figure 2 168 Axis rotation mode e Manual transformation via morph mode can be completed using either of the two options o The shape contour of the template model can be modified morphed using a combination of keyboard and mouse Press the key m and click with the mouse on the model if you click near the boundary of the model the contour changes when dragged and if you click inside the model the surface is moved in or out according to the direction of the dragging o The surface morphing functionalities described above can also be entered through the Morph mode Hereby the box is removed see Figure 2 169 the silhouette of the cap is drawn and the mouse position 1s visualized by a grey circle which marks the radius being affected by morphing The red direction arrow specifies the centre of the area being morphed and the direction of the morphing in relation to the user The cap can then be morphed by dragging silhouette the silhouette turns green when the mouse position is close enough or by dragging the blue ball attached to the base of the
242. person in your country under www wieland international com or call us under telephone number 49 72 31 37 05 0 WIELAND 535020e 03 02 09
243. portation security as shown in Figure 3 3 Two bolts for transport security plate Transport security plate Figure 3 3 Prepare for transportation D250 3 4 2 Transportation of the D640 Scanner 1 Close down the PC and disconnect the scanner 2 Fasten the tilt axis by taping foam around the axis as shown below Figure 3 4 Prepare for transportation D640 164 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3 Place the scanner in the original box as shown in Figure 3 5 Figure 3 5 D640 scanner in the original box 3shape gt 165 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved p 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape 3 5 ScanltRestoration user interface The scanning software ScanItRestoration offers a graphical user interface that allows the user to adjust scanner settings configure an order start the scan and validate the result of the scanned object s 3 5 1 Starting A Scan When ScanItRestoration is opened the user will be presented with an Order Form and the main interface screen On the form the scanning characteristics for the given patient can be entered The main interface screen 1s shown below General Scan Settings i E rder Form j l Lab information Order settings E Operstor Cider nunber nga 20071127 n848 d pem Importance Normal Anlaganist Client information Double preperat
244. r 1s equipped with a versatile semi automatic margin recognition function This means that the user needs to point the edge where the margin line approximately lies and then DentalDesigner algorithm will take care of finding the exact position of the margin line for the user to be able to modify it later on The action of indicating where the margin line lies is done by simply positioning the Selections blue control point next to where the margin line is NOTE If the order is created from ScanItRestoration using the default DCM scan file format selections for copings wax ups and telescope crowns will already be defined Otherwise these selections need to be made manually using the procedure defined below Selections for pontics always need to be made manually Process Copings wax ups and telescopes the selections need to be defined in a similar way as shown Figure 2 19 It should be added from the front and importantly placed approximately on the margin line Pontics there is no margin line here so the user just needs to be sure that the control point is added from the front and placed in the front part of the scanned stump and not on top of the gingiva see Figure 2 19 Placing the control point correctly will reduce the pontic handling as described in section 2 5 9 2 63 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual Figure 2 19 Correct placement of selections
245. r ID template field 6 Patient last name using All Characters where spacing string is Order ID template field 7 Unspecified W using All Is characters where spacing string is Order ID template field 8 Unspecified wa Using All r3 Characters where spacing string is I i im _ Crder ID template field 9 Unspecified wl using All re characters where spacing string is Default settings Figure 5 9 Order Form Settings order ID template For each field we can choose a field template type from the combo box The field template types are Field template type Description a SiteID SiteID of the system see section 5 6 4 1 E Date The date of order creation 3 Time The time of order creation The name of the software operator This field can be limited to a maximum number of Spero characters 5 Dentist The name of the dentist This field can be limited to a maximum number of characters E Patient last name The last name of the patient This field can be limited to a maximum number of characters 7 Patient first name The first name of the patient This field can be limited to a maximum number of characters E Random number A random 10 digit number generated at order creation 9 External OrderID The external Order ID This field can be limited to a maximum number of characters When choosing Unspecified in a field the field will have no purpose The template generate
246. r of working days and Closing time are related to Working days in the next section 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark 217 Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 User Manual 5 5 7 Working Days For the user s convenience the configuration of the processing times and delivery dates 1s possible see Figure 5 19 The settings are related to ERP please see the previous chapter Working days Default shipping time working days of Default Manufacturing Processing and Shipping time working days Holidays Double click day to change its state August 20608 Working day e Weekend 1 2 3 Annual holiday 2 9 10 15 16 22 23 29 30 31 E 5 B 7 Today 8 4 2008 Figure 5 19 Working days option 5 6 Material Settings In the Material Settings we can customize administrative information and settings for the shape and type of construction elements available through the applications in Dental System The customized settings ensure that the same data is used and kept unchanged in the Dental System applications In this way the user saves time in the modelling process in DentalDesigner as the values of the construction elements are loaded once and don t have to be typed in again When entering the Material Settings from the main menu the following screen appea
247. ral scans from the selected scanners Open preperation scan index 26 Look in e Crown de N gt gt AntagonistScan i 4 PreperationScan leeth tooth Mu Recent index to be Preview of Y Documents e ees the selected a ale model Desktop C Intra oral scan hy Documents T My Computer a File name Freperations can My Network Files of type Scan files dem amp stl amp hps r Figure 2 16 Importing a preparation scan into an order In order to complete the order definition process once all the relevant order information and operations have been specified the user can click OK button to advance to the first modelling stage NOTE The order data cannot be modified at a later stage therefore it is suggested to double check all the data before clicking OK If the order is defined from DentalManager the user will have the possibility to modify the order later on Existing orders previously created in ScanItRestoration or DentalDesigner or DentalManager can be opened in DentalDesigner by clicking the Open modelling button see Figure 2 17 Then the Dental Order Explorer pops up displaying all orders chronologically sorted so that the user is able to open any of them Filters for showing orders created at an earlier date can be selected as shown in Figure 2 8 L3 DentalDesiener pen modelling File wiew Help ail butt
248. rary A library is simply a collection of things no more no less It can contain different kinds of objects which are collected in a library for the user s convenience We ll be referring to libraries for instance when explaining pontics our collection of pontics is arranged numerically and stored in a folder Such folder is referred to as the pontics library Template A template is an object with basic characteristics belonging to a certain category A template is a sort of middleware it comes in a raw form and needs to be modified and customized An example for a template could be glasses lenses when one buys glasses the lenses need to be cut and shaped to fit the frame In this chapter we use the word template to define a pontic coming from our pontic library The template the middleware object is the pontic as it comes from the library it has the basic pontic characteristics but it still needs to be reworked and adapted to properly fit the bridge Spline The word spline is roughly a technical word to describe a curve For the purpose of this chapter whenever you ll read of a spline simply imagine you ll be facing an object that looks exactly like a curve Crucial is the fact that a spline often comes along with control points More precisely whenever the user is given the chance to modify and interact with a spline the interaction will happen through control points Bounding Box A generic bounding box is simply a
249. re ScanItRestoration The scanning is very intuitive although some technical knowledge is required to get optimal results from ScanItRestoration 3 2 Unpacking and Installation Please refer to the separate sheet for unpacking and installation The default Windows user 1s scan and the login password is also scan 3 2 1 Installing Third Party Computer Peripherals or Software The scanner is sold with a tested and approved PC In general 3Shape cannot guarantee the scanner functionalities if third party software or computer peripherals is installed More specifically any third party USB equipment such a USB printer USB hard drive USB memory stick or USB wireless network card should not be installed 3 3 Calibration By calibrating the scanner the internal scanner geometry and camera parameters are calculated It is recommended to calibrate the scanner regularly and always after it has been moved However if the scanner is placed on a stable table and at a constant temperature the calibration intervals can be increased An indication of a poorly calibrated scanner is a scanned model with a rough surface If this happens check if it is a recurrent problem as it might be attributed to the object not being properly placed on the fixture or that the fixture is not firmly fixed to the black interface plate Try scanning different objects and in particular objects of different materials 3 3 1 How to Perform a Calibration
250. re 4 10 Set the scanning height for crown scanning 4 4 2 2 Edit scan similar to the operations for a pontic scan the user will be asked to rotate the scanned crown to the correct orientation and then scale it to the correct size when scanning is finished Refer to Section 4 4 1 3 for more details When the crown scan has been rotated and scaled the user will be asked to cut the bottom of the scan and then the bottom will be closed A bottom boundary a spline will be drawn when the user puts points on the scan Finish drawing by clicking on the first point Click on Apply to see the result and on OK to finish this operation Figure 4 11 Cut the bottom of the crown scan before the bottom is closed 198 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved p 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape Subsequently the user can choose to edit the scan by using the tools Remove artefacts and Add remove materials Click on Next to go to the next step 1 e adding morph points 4 4 2 3 Add morph points The user need to add to the scan a lower boundary and a certain number of morph points in order to use the automatic initialisation in crown designing The method for adding the lower boundary is similar to that described in Section 4 4 2 2 When the boundary has been added the user will be guided to add up to three types of morph points When the required points have been added for a certain type a sign will appear as sho
251. refer to section 2 5 14 3 for more information on how to deal with the placement overview function in crown bridges Point dragging Changes the degree of spline point dragging for all features 2D Cross section Provides 2D cross section for a better model inspection 2D cross sections can be specified either by placing three points on the 3D model or by dragging a section line by holding down the left mouse button and then moving the mouse over the model Model visibility Enables visualization of the necessary number of 3D model elements e g with or without preparation for clearer analysis Validation Evaluates the restoration according to the standard minimal values pre set in Dental Control Panel or manually defined and marks the areas that need correction HINT Please refer to section 2 5 10 4 for more information on how to use the validation function in connectors and crown bridges Bounding box outlines the borders of the active element of the restoration selected or in case that no model 1s selected of the whole restoration Origin Assists orientation of the restoration model according to the standard three geometrical axes x y and z which are independent of the user point of view Set transparency Changes the degree of transparency for the following objects e Scans The uploaded scan models e Items The collection of elements in the modelling job e Active The modelling ele
252. reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual File View Help 2 5x 389 Bit t 2O Primary telescope direction r gt DW NOME NE ECCO EC F1 Directions Insertion direction a E cx m ee US amp re I e e e E 6 a amp R gy E E ee a e LIT Ay E E e Selections jg WM y v1 L Lr e A Telescope direction E Insertion direction d Insertion direction FA Insertion direction Order Primary telescope crown Zr Clinic Default Clinic Position _ Measure Rotation angl Process e Thel i 2 button in the Process toolbar is automatically clicked when leaving the selections step A dialog box appears e All telescope preparations are initially rotated into a position proposing a common telescope primary direction This is illustrated in Figure 2 21 The user point of view defines the telescope primary direction The undercut areas with respect to the insertion directions are visualized in red e The user can then rotate the model into a new position and press the Set direction button in the dialog box to save the current point of view as the telescope primary direction 2 4 3 3 Define insertion directions Overview This stage serves two purposes 65 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual Process 3shape Defining
253. rew The model of the screw is used to automatically generate a correctly shaped hole through the abutment if screw retained Abutment interface There are no specific requirements for the model of the interface This model is used for visualization purposes only Abutment base The model of the abutment base is a very crucial model in the abutment kit This surface describes that shape of the part of the abutment which connects either directly to the implant or to the interface pin The model is also the base or seating surface of the customized abutment The following requirements exist for the base geometry 1 The model must contain EXACTLY one boundary Hence this is not a watertight model nor should it contain the hole for the screw This will be automatically generated The normals of this surface must point outwards The image to the left hence shows the BACKSIDE of this base surface as the interface pin goes into the abutment If needed this surface should be DRILL COMPENSATED 1 e Boundary 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com 250 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 User Manual Csi contain no sharp edges which cannot be milled Scan abutment 3shape The model corresponds to the physical scan abutment However the non visible part of the mo
254. rformed is scanning a single die or tooth Once an order for a single die has been defined on the order form a prompt will appear to insert the Die into the scanner A BluTack Putty Figure 3 9 A Typical Die Figure 3 10 Ideal Fixing of Die The Die should be fixed to the plate using the BlueTack putty and then inserted into the scanner The plate will click into place inside the scanner Note put the die at the center of the plate The NEXT button should now be pressed and the Die will now scan and show the resulting scan on screen 170 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved h ps 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual ssnape Scanning Tooth 16 Scanning Cae ee eeg 2 Cop eaee 66 e T amp Figure 3 11 Scanning A Single Die The scan has now been saved to a predefined directory This directory may have previously been defined in the Dental System Control Panel under System Settings Order Directory If a rescan is required then this option can be selected If a rescan is selected then some extra options become available Difference map Figure 3 12 Rescanning A Single Die 171 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved p 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape Figure 3 12 shows the extra options that become available in the bottom left hand corner Scan Tooth should be selected to begin the rescan 3 7 2
255. rgin line on surface extremums i e sharp edges while high values will place the automatically detected margin line where the Angle criterium is fulfilled A postprocessing step in the automatic detection scheme high values applies significant Smoothin smoothing to the automatically detected margin line making it appear very aestheticall 8 8 y 8 8 pp ry y pleasing but less accurate and vice versa for small values 5 7 System Maintenance how to update and configure your system The new 3Shape Dental System release introduces a significant number of new features and settings as well as new applications Please refer to the user manuals for the individual products for further details all documents are available in the folder C Program Files 3Shape Documentation To provide an overview of the entire 3Shape Dental System this use case chapter is added The chapter illustrates the scenario of a standard non encrypted stand alone installation The focus of the use case is on the actions and settings required in order to Upgrade from a previous 3Shape Dental System installation Understand the new floating licenses ME E m Inspect the result of the upgrade 4 Brief introduction to DentalManager including setting up the DentalManager Inbox add on module The behavior of more advanced installations e g encrypted and shared installations will be mentioned where appropriate 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenh
256. ridge either crown or pontic further or closer to the gingiva and the neighbouring dental items See Figure 2 150 for the overview of the process Click Reposition the spline in the grey View toolbar box in the left upper corner of the modelling window to revert the changes made to the spline completely Figure 2 150 Manual modification of the crown bridge shape pontic replacement RA By clicking the Placement overview button the user is offered two options Reposition spline and Reset connectors New in 2008 1 The user can change the position of the spline choose the Reset connectors option and the program automatically places the connectors in the new position see Figure 2 151 Placement 21 23 Reposition spline Aula connector preview ad DD EET um S mp A y Figure 2 151 Placement overview Manual modification of the crown bridge 138 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape 2 6 AbutmentDesigner add on module 2 6 1 The AbutmentDesigner user interface differences from DentalDesigner As far as the user interface of the AbutmentDesigner does not differ from the one which is used in DentalDesigner see chapter 2 3 for the relevant information An example of the Process toolbar showing the steps involved in modelling a customized abutment 1s shown in Figure 2 152 Unl
257. rite Smile Coping 16 Zirkon 5 6 mm 84 mm Modelled 05 10 2007 9999111465389 0959 99991 20071004 Miller s Milling Brite Smile Abutment 13 Titan Scanned Figure 1 36 Sample List Print 40 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 1 2 7 7 Print Labels sshape Labels for the selected orders may be printed by selecting Print Label or by hitting the F9 function key The labels will be printed on the printer that 1s selected under Help Label Printer Settings The default layout is designed for 40x40 mm labels as shown below 1 2 7 8 Reset Client Order ID 9999111441389 Type Material Brite Smile Coping Zirkon Batch ID Figure 1 37 Sample Label Print It may be necessary to reset an order to a specific status in some unusual cases e g to force an order to be re modelled the order must be reset to Scanned see Figure 1 38 3Shape Dental Manager Orders Sele Options Help 5 di000_20080729_1534 EELEE iy By date 3 Today i li ig Last two days Last week l w Last two weeks Y By status Created Scanned A Modelled 4 LJ w LJ Other filters Checked out Im All open ois Pa Search Order number s di000 20 E di000 20 s di000 20 W d1000 20 Create date 28 07 2008 12 29 07 2008 15 30 07 2008 10 30 07 2008 11
258. rs 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark 218 Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved sshape Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 User Manual PP Dental System Control Panel Material Settings PIE ta Save o Back Navigation Home Tasks Material Settings Countries ue Operators wp Sites e Materials T a wp Manufacturing processes Countries Operators e Colors P Copings i prever c cascos Manufacturing e Waxups ep Crowns d v Sites J Manufacturing processes P Margin line ro gp x E x Contact data e Pontics Connectors eb Abutments gt Bars A Materials A Colors Construction elements sd Copings Pontics Primary telescopes Connectors Waxups _ butments ba Crowns Margin line Figure 5 20 Material Settings The Material Settings displays two major categories of settings Contact data and Manufacturing Information related to customers and manufacturing including definitions of sites clinics labs and manufactures materials and manufacturing processes which are all used in the Order Form These settings are described in section 5 6 2 and 5 6 4 Construction elements Material specific customization of construction elements to be used in DentalDesigner These settings are described in section 0 NOTE It is mandatory that the user not ye
259. ruction elements have an associated Cement Space item When entering the Telescope Overlay items through the link on 35 the interface on 36 appears 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark 231 Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved gt Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 User Manual 3sha pe Edit Telescope overlay Iti Telescopecerlay1 Change ID Mame Telescope overlay Zr DELIE Wall height 1 000 ifm Telescope angle 2 Telescope smooth 1 1 o Telescope default height 3 po E Terre Y Telescope border margin line shaped Overlays Figure 5 36 Item data linked to from other items In general when entering an item group through another item we will refer to this item as the owner of the linked item in the entered item group Other than the specific telescope overlay data which will be explained in section 0 two points on 36 are important to notice Material dependencies The material specified for an item is unchangeable if the owner has this material specified Only if the owner s have no material specified can it be changed When the owner s have no material specified all existing items are displayed on the list Otherwise when the owner has a material specified only items with that particular material specified can be chosen and are displayed on the item list From 36 we can conclude that
260. ry telesco Default Clinic A32 Addjremove material suce view E Process e Click the L button in the Process toolbar A dialog box will appear 1 Rari E mE eu e Click on the telescope surface to set the position of the attachment A point indicating the position will appear This point can be dragged along the surface or removed again when pressing the Clear button e In Figure 2 112 the attachment point has been positioned The green cross at the point indicates the angle and depth of the attachment These settings can be adjusted through the dialog box o The Name drop down box offers a list of components to choose from as visualized in Figure 2 113 o The Adjust angle slider changes the angle of the attachment insertion direction as illustrated in Figure 2 114 111 Copyright 2000 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved sshape o In the Min dist to interface edit box the minimum distance between the telescope interface and the frontal surface of the attached component can be adjusted The green cross will be moved either inwards or outwards accordingly This 1s illustrated in Figure 2 115 o Press Apply for the chosen component to be attached as shown in Figure 2 116 The component can be repositioned by moving the attachment point remember to also readjust the angle or removed by pressing Clear
261. s in the Dental System Control Panel once FTP and dongle are properly configured Finally the sending system has to be configured as well The procedures are explained in the chapter 0 Dental System Control Panel The inbox automatically searches the FTP server for new orders 3 hane Nental Manager x Ordefs Inbox Options Help do E j ant P vem pem G T Order number Delivery date Client h s Orders di0D0 20 y di000_20 1000 20 7 30 2008 3 Bridge 11 23 Zirkon ge diDO0 20 b W di000 20 7 31 2008 Order number diO000 20080730 1538 Patient 1 Items Selected Creation date 7 30 2008 Bridge 11 23 61158 3shape gt Figure 1 53 Orders in the Inbox Right click on the order in the Inbox to select the desired option see Figure 1 54 45 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved P 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape 3Shape Dental Manager kB Orders Inbax Options Help e NC Order number Delivery date diO00 20 s di000 20 digo 20 7 30 2008 Elate fea T 3 Zirkon sl Auto Accept a di1000 20 v Accept a d1000 20 7 31 2008 v Accept All Mum e Reject Ctrl R m a Open Ctrl M Order number d1000_20080730_1538 1 Items Selected yeation date 7 30 2008 CP 3D Preview Ctrl Ww Shipping date 7 30 2008 a Refresh F5 Receive date 7 30 2008 s Advanced Fi
262. s of dental impressions Using the latest technologies the DentalDesigner software facilitates fast and easy modelling of complex constructions as well as enabling automatic manufacturing of the final restoration model on computer aided production equipment This chapter introduces the DentalDesigner software and presents the modelling process as well as the tools and features available to the user Furthermore a worked example for getting quickly started with the DentalDesigner software is provided From herein it is assumed that the DentalDesigner user is familiar with the traditional process of making customized dental restorations The Software described in the chapter is covered by Terms and Conditions according to the End User License Agreement issued either by 3Shape A S or by the Partner of 3Shape A S by whom you have acquired this Partners particular version of the Software System Requirements Operating System Windows XP SP2 SP3 or Windows Vista SPI Processor Intel Core 2 Duo 2 0GHz or higher is recommended RAM 1GB minimum 2GB recommended Graphics Card with OpenGL 2 0 support and at lease 256 MB of memory HDD 80GB and larger Network Network Internet connection Mouse with the wheel button support System Requirements Windows XP Windows Vista 49 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape 2 2 Glossary While reading this c
263. s only going to be used from a single computer within the site The Server Client installation is recommended if the software is going to be used from more computers within the site The advantages of the Server Client installation in this case is o The software is only installed on a single computer making this and future upgrades more simple as well as making it more simple to maintain the systems in daily operations o All the orders within the site are stored in the same shared folder and in the same database o The client installations can be made and operated on all the computers in the network of the site so you are not limited to work on a specific computer the 3Shape Dongle Server handles the available licenses 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark 262 Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved gt Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 User Manual 3sha pe 5 7 1 2 Backup NOTE It is strongly recommended to make a backup of the system as part of the upgrade procedure This way it is possible to restore your system should an error occur during the installation El 3Shape Dental System Upgrade Stand alone Create backup eo Create backup Please make sure no other 35hape software is running before continuing Type a description for the backup Ensure that you choose a description that is easy to identify in case you need
264. s which allow DentalManager to easily transfer orders from your site to a central manufacturing site and vice versa bY Dental System Control Panel Site td Save OQ Back Navigation Home Material Settings Taske Edit Site Import site s from server ID Change ID External ID for interfacing with third party software Site Clinic ABC CPH lab Name Central milling center Jespers This site Active Michaels Sub site ID Order number site ID Has scanner Hide inactive items Has CAD wp add Has C M dis Copy x Delete FTP IP address URL name Bj Move up By Moye down FTP port FTP user Recycle bin FTP password e No beams FTP directory Ls Reshole all bern FTP secure socket x Einpb Hoe Recycle Bln Test connection ms Figure 5 109 The site page of your own site This site 1s checked NOTE In 109 the settings for your own site are shown In the 3Shape Dental System a globally unique SiteID 1s defined for each site making your site unique on the global level see also section 0 We strongly recommended you to keep your globally unique SiteID NOTE Please note that if you had more individual dongles in the previous releases of the Dental System then we recommend that you contact your software provider to have these dongles organized under the same site You may also choose to collect all the licenses in the same single dongle please refer to section 0 for a discussion of fl
265. scaling for this specific cross section in the dialog box in mm HINT Click Apply to view all the recently applied changes Upon completion of the Edit bar step the user will be taken back to the Add remove material stage to finalise the modelling process of the whole restoration See chapter 2 5 6 for details 159 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved T p 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape 2 Dental System Motion Controllers Support Dental System products support SpaceBall motion controllers Wacom Graphire and Bamboo graphics tablets or other tablets complying with the WinTab standard The indicated controllers use USB interface to connect to a computer and must have appropriate drivers installed to function correctly Please refer to the manufacturer website for support on the latest drivers available for your controller 2 1 Graphics Tablets support A graphics tablet is an electronic device allowing the user to hand draw images the usual way with images appearing on a computer screen Some tablets can also be used for primary pointing and navigation instead of the mouse The Dental System supports graphics tablets complying with the WinTab standard One of the graphics tablets is shown on the image below While in the DentalDesigner mode the graphics tablet stylus supports the following functions e Second Stylus Tip Support When the Add Remove Smooth function
266. se Also it 1s possible to check for dongle updates from within this page see also chapter 5 4 for updating dongles and the log file for the 3Shape Dongle Service can be displayed The log file is a useful debug tool in case the Dongle Service does not respond as expected 2006 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved p 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape ape Dongle Service Windows Internet Explorer PESE E http Tlaptop11 27027 ka 2o o Ms Live Searcl Fey lt eS no I I I IIo ammo 3 de j E 35hape Dongle Service a xi 3 Pa gt Tools 3Shape Dongle Service dersion 1 0 7 0 DentalDesigner Expires 2007 12 15 Points in dongle 4 Points in use 0 Points available 4 Dongle number 3590263702 Client Price Connections DentalManager Dental Designer 1 Points in dongle 3 Points in use 1 Points available 2 Clie nt t Price Connec tions ns Dental Manager 1 192 T DentalManager Inbox module Points in dongle 5 Points in use Q Points available 5 Client p Price Connec tions Dental Manager Inbox module 1 Check for dongle updates Show server log file Local time 2007 12 16 11 56 12 UTC time 2007 12 16 10 56 12 Local intranet Figure 5 5 Status of the 3Shape Dongle Service If the 3Shape Dongle Service for some reason needs to be restarted the Configure services button takes you direc
267. se to complete operation click OK move on fashion This is obviously good to keep a working session easy natural and smooth but designing complex restorations like 14 unit bridges requires a superior flexibility that a simple linear workflow cannot provide Therefore in DentalDesigner the user is given the chance to always go back to previous steps and when possible to jump automatically several steps forward Get a deeper insight into the two main tools that control DentalDesigner workflow and its step interaction the Main toolbar and the Process toolbar in the following sections 69 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual Defined items Bridge Orientate model A Die overlay 3 Add remove material bzg Figure 2 27 Definition of the insertion direction displayed with blue arrows This stage handles the actual 3D modelling of individual items in the modelling job For each item in the restoration the Process toolbar contains a number of specific operational steps In the following the handling of these steps are described in general Sections 2 4 4 1 to 2 4 4 5 introduce the steps associated with each type of dental item The individual operations are described in detail in chapter 2 5 Process e The first element in the modelling job is automatically activated when entering stage 3 of the modelling process e The user is not supposed to ha
268. sed it is possible to change the points using mouse By dragging the mouse on a point it is possible to move it The neighbouring points may also be affected depending on the Point dragging value see Section 2 3 2 It is also possible to delete individual points by right clicking on a point and choosing Remove and to add points by right clicking on the spline and choosing Add It is always possible to get a new estimate of the margin line by pressing the Re cale button which re calculates the red spline It is always possible to clear the spline by pressing the Clear button The user can either place the spline manually by clicking with the mouse rarely recommended or auto place the spline by pressing the Re calc button Advanced Settings The Point distance box defines the distance between each point on the automatically extracted spline The Angle is the angular difference between the margin direction as described below and the angle used in the red pencil margin line algorithm Figure 2 41 and Figure 2 42 show the result when increasing the angle from 0 to 5 degrees This illustrates how the angle between the margin direction marked yellow and the red pencil direction marked red increases accordingly HINT Increasing the angle generally moves the automatically extracted spline up while decreasing the angle generally lowers the spline the result 1s less pronounced on very sharp margin lines
269. ses 139 2 6 2 The modelling process in AbutmentDesigner M seen tette tenete noni 139 2 6 2 1 Executing the Program ccccccccccsssssessssssesesseseeeseseseseeeseseeeeeeeeeeeseseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 140 2 6 2 2 Stage ELO Tu A 140 2 6 2 3 Stage 2 Directions ssssseseeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeseeseseesessesseessseeseseessesessessesssssssseeseseeessssessssssseesesssssssseeeees 143 2 6 2 4 Stage 3 Design cc ecesesseesssssssssesssesseeseeeseseeeeeeeeeseseeeeeeeseeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeegs 146 2 0 2 9 MINN St Sere nese esta wc ne cto Serene eas uem serene uso seast EE E EEE O yaaa cee 147 Dee OPA SV quU UEM 147 2 6 3 Mode onOne ra 6 M gene eee Em 148 L A 1 eee eee 148 DO PROC CSS TC P 148 2 1 DENTAL SYSTEM MOTION CONTROLLERS SUPPORT onieeseasoncetssencvee teen Cete esses eB CR ip edu eeuusooedetedseneonetecndeaavigdvertias 160 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark 4 Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved gt 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3sha ge 2 7 1 Graphics Tablets support ssssssssssssssssssssseeeeeee eene e nennen enne ee eee eese ses sse se esses sess ee sess enne ener ne
270. so described 4 2 Add library in Dental System Control Panel Before making scans for a new library the user should define it in Dental System Control Panel 4 2 1 Add pontic library Follow the procedures below 1 Run Dental System Control Panel and go to Materials Settings Pontics Add a pontic library and set the library path to the folder just created see Figure 4 1 Note do not change the library paths for the default 3Shape libraries W Dental System Control Panel Pontic libraries Mea Save Back Navigation Home Material Settings ull Pontic libraries Edit Pontic Pontic Anatomical pontic 1D Pontic MMC ZR E Pontic library path 5 Pontic library path vpcasYsshape Dental Systeri Dental Systerm Control ParieMibrarysshapelPanticss x Gelete Movie up By Move dawn M Figure 4 1 Add a custom pontic library in Dental System Control Panel 4 2 2 Add crown library Follow the procedures below 1 Create a folder for the new library in Windows Explorer 2 Run Dental System Control panel and go to Materials Settings Crowns Add a path in the Library Paths List and set the path to the folder just created as show in Figure 4 3 3 Add your own Crown type and ensure that the path just created is checked in the Library Paths List as show in Figure 4 5 192 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3shape 3ShpeDenalSgstem2008 1 UerMama SAPO PTT Sy
271. spline points visualisation 1s enabled with the Show Points checkbox Splines can be moved with the cursor by clicking the desired spline point and dragging it while keeping the left mouse button pressed Recalculate button allows to rebuilt the spline while the Clear button removes it 82 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved P 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape Crown 22 Finish Margin line S Remove artefacts Margin line Show undercuts Show points m Advanced n Modify crown Margin line Margin line Show undercuts Show points To remove a particular spline point right click it with the cursor and select Remove from the appeared menu The points distance on the spline is defined in the Advanced dialogue Advanced BA US Point distance 0 500 3 nm Angle k s 2 5 5 Die interface Overview This step cuts the scanned model using the defined margin line The remaining part of the model is offset to create the inside called interface of the item being modelled The parameters used for the offset operation are defined either in the materials file created by the Dental System Control Panel or manually by changing the values in the user interface These parameter values depend on the choice of production equipment and on the materials used for manufacturing Furthermore the undercut areas may be removed so that the item is inserted properly after
272. ssociated with each type of dental item Individual operations are described in detail in chapter 2 5 60 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved p 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3sha pe 2 4 1 Executing the Program DentalDesigner is started by double clicking the DentalDesigner desktop icon l or via the Windows Start menu Start All Programs 3Shape DentalDesigner When the application is started the screen displayed in Figure 2 13 appears This screen denotes the DentalDesigner application with no orders open E DentaWesigner EK File View Help 260 Figure 2 7 The DentalDesigner application with no orders open 2 4 2 Stage 1 Order Before starting a modelling session an order needs to be defined We strongly recommend users to create the new and open the existing orders using DentalManager Orders created in DentalDesigner or ScanItRestoration will not be in the DentalManager database Please refer to the DentalManager chapter Create an Order for the details However the user is still able to create and open orders in DentalDesigner 61 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved gt 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape When using DentalDesigner to define an order the Order Form will be followed by one or several open scan file dialogs to import the scan files conceived in the modelling to the order We can also use intra o
273. stem Control Panel Crown hr uA Mo auinatnn nme b Malesia Ger inas 7j Save 4 back Navigation Home gt Material Settir y tt 2c p oo I igacon nom aterial 5etting Edit Crown ID Crowni Zirkon Change mp AE Change path Material ID Change path Color Not specified H fied Please select a valid name nr M M Library name 3Shape Standard Library path Crown library path Please select a valid path Mupc a3i3sshape Dental System Dental System Control Panel Path Not available Library paths list in Library r Glide ik Version 1 0 paths list Recycle bin Shia rismat l 3Shape Standard e No items Glidewell Prismatik Version 1 0 5 Restore all items v Empty the Recycle Bin L Details Total Figure 4 2 Add a path to Library Paths List in Dental System Control Panel 193 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved gt 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 UserManal PET PI Dental System Control Panel Crown lH Save E Back Navigation Home Material Settings Edit Crown Crown zr Crown Ti ID C Fehr 1 C h ar g ge I Li xe Material ID zirkon ja Color Not specified Mi Library name MyCrownLib Library path C BE Crown library path dis add MUpcasi3shape Dental Systemibental System Control Paneli dp Copy x Delete 5 ove up Library paths list m Move down R le bi ecycle bin PhyCrownLib um ho items Bj Restore all tems
274. t Figure 1 3 Multiple selection and sorting 1 2 1 DentalManager shortcut keys DentalManager has the shortcut keys that make the work with the software faster and easier see Table 1 The user can right click on the order and view the shortcut keys next to the corresponding option NOTE By double clicking the order the program brings it to the next level of the process and its status changes automatically e g Created gt double click gt Scanning or Scanned gt double click gt Modelling This makes the workflow faster and easier 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark 11 Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual o Mest F6 Export ERP File Explore Order w Madel Ctrl D Explore CAM Re Model Ctrlt Alt O Generate CAM Output ida CtrI N Print List M CtrI M Modify Selected B uu CtrHS Label send I ES CtrI Alt I L MBSE ear Track and Trace a Re 5ran Ctrl AICt R Send Ea Manufacturer odd check Out Ctri U i Wm 3DPreview ew q Refresh FS select same Patient Ctrl Alt P Same Client Ctrl Alt C Same Status Ctrl Alt S Same Delivery Date Ctrl Alt D Height Range Ctrl Alt H Volume Range Ctrl Alt V Advanced Import Ctrl I Export to File CtrI E Export to FTP Ctrl F Export to Mail Ctrl L 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K
275. t familiar with the Control Panel system reads the introduction section 5 6 1 before changing any settings and section 0 before changing settings for the construction elements 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark 219 Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved gt Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 User Manual 3sha pe 5 6 1 Interface Before describing the Material Settings data interface we will shortly explain the use of the following terms e Item Item group Subcategorized material settings like Pontics or Materials will collectively be referred to as Material Setting Item groups Since all item groups e g the pontic item group contain a list of Pontic settings each of these will be referred to as a pontic setting Item e Link All Item groups can be entered through a link like Entering any item group through the Material Settings screen the user will be faced with an interface similar to the one displayed in Figure 5 21 with names of all the entered items displayed in a list on the left and the data associated with the currently selected item displayed on the right Dental System Control Panel ll Save eS Back Navigation Home Material Settings Operator item group Table Edit Operator ID Operatori Change ID James Thomson Item data em dp Copy x Delete
276. t the content of the order directories Directory Default may be changed Content All internal 3Shape data related to the order including scan data internal 3Shape modelling data and order information Order directory C 3Shape Manufacturing data for CAM this is the Manufacturing output directory C 3Shape ManufacturingDir directory to find output models from DentalDesigner NOTE The manufacturing output directory for a given order only exists if the order 1s created for internal manufacturing If the order is sent for remote manufacturing e g sent through DentalManager to a central milling center then there will not exist CAM data for the given order See Figure to Figure it illustrates the content of the output directories for an order created in DentalManager 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark 268 Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 User Manual 3Shape Dental Manager Orders Inbox ejes a i gg Orders Number Er By date g 14 Order s in Inbox Search Creation date Items Material Status D ge er d1000_20081009 1648 10 9 2008 4 49 01 PM 10 11 2008 Crown 21 22 Zirkon Modelled 10 9 2008 5 21 00 PM 10 11 2008 Crown 21 22 Zirkon I c 1000 20081009 1720 Scanned T Today b B di000_20081010_1001 10 8
277. t will be the same for all the telescopes The user interface in the insertion direction step The interface and the user interaction in defining the insertion direction are slightly different from any other operation in DentalDesigner and therefore need extra attention in explanation Imagine holding the cast with your hand looking at it and trying to define the best insertion direction for a six unit prosthesis as the one shown in Figure 2 21 Typically you might want to look at the cast and rotate it with your hands until you find the insertion direction that would best fit the cast and or the restoration The insertion direction step of DentalDesigner reproduces a similar process you can look at the cast from the top and when you think you found the right direction you can push the OK button Two small cylindrical arrows green for the primary telescope insertion direction and light blue for the standard insertion direction located above and below the preparation scan indicate the current insertion direction DentalDesigner calculates an insertion direction using a standard algorithm upon entering this step so the user will initially face a pre calculated direction While this direction is supposed to be appropriate in most cases the user is allowed to modify it by pushing the Set direction button and pushing OK when they feel confident with the chosen direction 64 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights
278. tal Manager Orders Sear ch F ield Options Help MSE 5 9 Nen Client identification di000 20 29 07 2008 15 29 07 2008 29 07 2008 Default Manufz i Patient last name 3 Today w Match whole text 3 Last two days T Last week Last two weeks Ly By status Created Scanned _ eo Modelled LT x Sent A Closed Hil mher di000 20080729 1534 t te date 29 07 2008 stenal Zirkon Gate 29 07 2008 Coping 12 ManufacturerDefault1 date 29 07 2008 Coping 22 ManufacturerDefault1 tuer Default Manufacturer ient Default Manufacturer Figure 1 30 Order Search Enter the search enquiry to get a list of matching orders The last request is always stored in the Search node 1 2 7 3 Select Orders with Common Values Orders having common values can be selected to assist the order handling when e g checking out orders having the status Scanned and created Last Week see Figure 1 31 36 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual sshape 3Shape Dental Manager EER Orders Options Help di000 20080729 1534 SELLE o 9 lay By date 3 3 ww T Today Last two days Last week Last two weeks oy By status Created Order number s di000 20 if E di000 20 gt di000 20 20 30 07 2008 11 W d1000 20 Create date 28 07 2008 1
279. tal System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape 3 7 8 2 Align Scan Abutments When the detailed scanning and post processing for abutments is finished the user will be prompted to align the abutments one by one To align an abutment select two corresponding points on the CAD model and the scanned abutment one point on each model and click on Apply as shown below The alignment result will be displayed on the screen Click on OK if the result is satisfying and continue to align the next abutment Align Abutment Select two corresponding points one on each model C 3 point alignment Figure 3 32 Align abutments The tool 2D cross section can be used for alignment evaluation 2D cross section will be activated when the button located in the Visualization Toolbar highlighted in the figure below is clicked on Refer to the DentalDesigner chapter for more details Figure 3 33 Button for 2D Cross Section 3 7 8 3 Scan Gingival Mask Preparation Scan Once abutment alignment is finished the user will be prompted to remove the abutments from the arch and insert the gingival masks if the gingival masks are removable Similar to bridge scanning the user should select the area for detailed scanning after a rough selection scan The area should include the whole area for designing as shown below 186 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved p 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape
280. tandards and marks the areas which need correction e Click the ih Validation button on the Visualization toolbar A small dialog box will appear in the right upper corner of the modelling window 105 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved T p 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape Validation Validation Update Automatically Update Automatically Apply Material Settings Connector 26 25 Apply Material Settings Thickness 0 60 mm Type Connector Thickness 0 60 mm ead 10 00 mm Number 26 25 Ads 10 00 mm Area 4 04 mm Strength 0 01 Strength 0 01 I alidation Failed Connector cross section Connector cross section Figure 2 94 Correction the mistake detected through area validation e In the modelling window areas marked with green ticks are valid according to the technical standards associated with the type of restoration and its material Areas marked with red exclamation marks are the problem areas that seek thorough investigation and appropriate correction e Right click on the red and green marks to see settings of the individual models and compare their measurements with the material specific minimum norms e g thickness area or strength See Figure 2 94 for area validation applied to a connector e Comparing either check Apply Material Settings to refer to the material specific minimum norms pre set in Dental System Control Panel or un check Apply Material Settings and ent
281. te dialogue RIGHT Selecting Bite area for detail scan The above image to the left shows the dialogue prompting the user to insert the Cast with the Bit model mounted Once Next 1s selected a rough preview scan will begin On completion of this quick preview scan the area of interest should be selected for detailed scanning Once the detail scanning is complete the bite can be removed when prompted The cast should remain in the scanner Sr a ih Gre 4 0999 ec Figure 3 25 Use the same selection as Bite dialogue Once the bite has been removed from the cast the same selection for the detail scan can be used for the teeth underneath This saves the user reselecting the area again Once this scan is finished the user will be given the opportunity to select and delete unnecessary areas of the bite scan 180 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved p 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape 3 7 5 3 Trimming Bite Scan Now that the bite and the model have been scanned then the scans will be displayed together onscreen It becomes quickly obvious that some of the Bite scan needs to be trimmed ScanItRestoration will now allow this C ScanltRestoration Pc60 3Shape Generic dental saves test number1 number1 xml File View Help Remove Bite oc amp a CBee a Cees eco Oa oo we kd e e t Figure 3 26 All scans onscreen 181 Copyright 2000
282. ted this button is only enabled when the Remove undercuts button in the Settings group is checked the colour map displays the amount of undercut removal performed Due to the standard offset the offset 1s not included in the difference map o When the Drill compensation button is selected this button is only enabled when the Drill compensation button in the Settings group is checked the colour map displays the amount of drill compensation performed Due to the standard offset the offset is not included in the difference map e The Depth value shows the offset at the mouse cursor Advanced Settings The properties of the die interface are specified under Advanced Settings See Figure 2 48 and Figure 2 49 e Cement gap is the amount of offset in the area of the margin line e Extra cement gap is the amount of offset in the upper part of the interface e Dist to margin line is the distance from the margin line to the borderline marking the border between the cement gap and the extra cement gap offsets e Smooth dist is the area around the borderline in which the interface is smoothed This ensures a smooth transition between the two parts of the interface having different offsets e Drill radius is the radius of the spherical drill tool applied only relevant when applying milling machines in the production step In Figure 2 50 the drill which compensated parts of the interface surface marked with green square refle
283. the application at its installation directory The DentalDesigner tab should now have a location if the step was completed successfully To enable automatic saving of the open order check the Use auto save during modelling check box and specify an interval with which DentalDesigner should save your work If you do not want automatic saving turned on per default leave this check box unchecked Autosave can always be turned on or off on a per modelling basis from DentalDesigner s File menu If the Force validation on save check box is checked then DentalDesigner will force the Validation form to be shown at the end of the modelling in order to verify that the specified parameters coping thickness etc are satisfied AddRemove Intelligent Component The AddRemove Intelligent Component checkbox is checked by default allowing to use a much improved Add Remove function in DentalDesigner The improvements concern the addition of a Smooth function revised processing algorithm and increased speed When the checkbox is not marked the old Add Remove function is used instead The images below illustrate Add Remove Material windows when AddRemove Intelligent Component checkbox in Dental System Control Panel is enabled and disabled The smooth function is disabled in the last option 203 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved p 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape Add remove material Surface Paramet
284. the default top cap file The user however may load their own top cap and apply it to the abutment design 4 Top cap Overview This step transforms the previously loaded abutment top cap AbutmentDesigner provides a default position of the top cap and the user can change position and shape of the model using a number of transformation tools see Figure 2 166 152 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual EJ DentalDesigner Wpc03 3Shape d1000_20080929_1549 d1000_20080929 IRE I nn File View Help A LIL BBQ poito w Abutment top cap mm Model visibility Scans Preparation Abutment kit C Scan abutment Design Top cap shape Transformation Rotation mode Free Axis L Remove Undercuts Fit Top Cap A Implant v Interface C Base C Screw Morph mode Fit to Emergence Profile i ee ee Edit top cap boundary gs e Information BS e S Show top cap angle E e Qy Show top cap undercuts pm E T Collisions between models x m A b Abutment 36 Pa Finish f Remove artefacts w Emergence profile Load Order Abutment 36 35 34 Clinic Kiev Add remove material SN ees C 4 Assembly L E s Ls Initializing Figure 2 166 Transforming the template abutment top c
285. the insertion direction this is the direction according to which the restoration is inserted on top of the die When working with a telescope crown this is just a direction the telescope is inserted on top of the die the primarily insertion direction of the prosthesis on top of the telescope is explained in paragraph 2 4 3 2 If the restoration is subsequently produced using a milling machine this direction also defines the milling direction used during manufacturing Please refer to paragraph 2 4 3 2 for an explanation of the user interface for insertion direction For copings automatic insertion direction finding will typically work fine without further intervention from the user However the user will be able to modify the insertion direction in order to have it best fitting the design Setting the margin line the margin line has already been roughly indicated by the user in the Selections step described in paragraph 2 4 3 1 Based on user s indication DentalDesigner will draw the margin using a predefined algorithm In typical conditions this semi automatic margin line definition system works fine and does not need further intervention from the user However the user will be able to modify the margin line in order to have it best fitting the design The margin line itself is a spline see definition in the Glossary and it can be modified placing or moving control points attached to it Within the insertion directions step the user has tw
286. the mouse over the specified items Activation and switching among jobs using left click on the corresponding item this allows the user to switch among jobs at any moment Set the visibility of scans and restorations can be toggled by right clicking on the corresponding item This allows the user to show or hide the scan or the completed job at any time t F 0999 eegc FI eee cce 6 T g Figure 2 2 The Overview toolbar 56 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved T S 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape 2 3 4 Process toolbar 2 3 4 1 Overview Migration from traditional dental restoration manufacturing techniques to the dental CAD system can be hard for some users A trained technician who has developed craftsmanship and expertise with traditional tools during his training and career will be required to switch over to a different system in which workflow is different and results are achieved in a different way Also instead of knives slices and solid restoration the technician will have to learn how to interact with computer input devices such as keyboard and mouse and be prepared to see the result of his work on a computer screen The DentalDesigner CAD software is conceived to make this migration as smooth as possible Bringing this into the focus all the functions tools the user interface and the workflow system have been developed The whole workflow o
287. the transition between the telescope cone and the basis coping surface along with the shape of the cone The shape can be adjusted manually by dragging the control points see Figure 2 98 If the telescope cone surface intersects with the basis coping surface the lower control points that needs to be moved and the connecting lines will be marked with red as illustrated in Figure 2 99 Figure 2 98 Mouse move lower control points Figure 2 99 Intersection areas marked NOTE The user will not be allowed to complete a telescope with intersecting cone and basis coping surfaces e The shape of the telescope can be adjusted through the Primary crown settings group on the dialog box which contains the following parameters 108 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved p 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape o The Angle of the telescope is measured along the telescope primary direction defined in section 2 4 3 2 and can be adjusted dynamically See Figure 2 101 and Figure 2 107 o The Smooth slide bar changes the smoothness of the green telescope top lines which defines the shape of the top When no smoothness is applied the lines will follow the surface of the basis coping See Figure 2 104 Figure 2 105 and Figure 2 106 o The Min height edit box shows the current minimum telescope cone height defined as the minimum distance between the upper and lower control points See Fi
288. third party rapid prototyping milling machines which accepts STL files as input please contact your local 3Shape dealer for more details Moreover most commonly the 3Shape Dental System is bundled as OEM component along with rapid prototyping milling machines whose specific output is generated according to vendor s specification Different situations are possible and taking in account each of them is beyond the purpose of this manual please refer to your local 3Shape dealer distributor OEM partner to have assistance on production related issue As DentalDesigner typically saves modeling using 3Shape s proprietary dcm file format the Generate CAM output function is the function to be used to have the modeling exported in a file format which is suitable for production typically STL or other proprietary 3D file formats The term CAM output is used as different production machines may require different kind of output and the 3Shape Dental System supports a number of those It is possible to generate CAM output from the modelled orders if it is supported by the current DentalManager system In this case it can be accessed from the advanced tab with the right click popup menu as shown on 37 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual BEA 3 hape Dental Manager Options Help Orders Inbox Da ag Orders m Lay By date 8 28 2004 u Today a Send to Manufacturer
289. ting various manufacturing types The Manufacturing page differs depending on the actual manufacturing type and are thus not described in this chapter Please consult your local distributor to inquire for support and documentation for your specific manufacturing type 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark 216 Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved h p Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 User Manual SST eS 5 5 6 ERP and Processing Time Settings The aim of the ERP export from DentalManager interface is to automatically enable an order information exchange between DentalManager and the manufacturer ERP system such as Microsoft business solution SAP Oracle or JENMAR The exported information can be used for accounting shipping etc The actual configuration is made in the control panel see Figure 5 18 Selection of ID Please select a valid unique ID for the new Jt ERP and processing time Dental System Control Panel ERP and processing time ld Save Oo Back Navigation Home Dental Manager ERP and processing time ERP and processing time ID Coping Change ID Mame Lopingl Job type Coping Material zirkon Maximum number af items qf add ERP Item Copy a Delete cS Mowe up Closing time 1600 00 g Move down Humber of working days 1 Figure 5 18 ERP order information configuration The Numbe
290. tion and have other pontics or copings adjacent to it 3shape n Margin line Ro Pe 1 Rve L apes Figure 2 30 The modelling steps for a wax up l P j Load pontic model on Figure 2 31 The modelling steps for a pontic 73 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape 2 4 4 5 Connector A connector is modelled in a single step as displayed in Figure 2 32 A connector is the link between two adjacent items copings wax up and pontics in a bridge and is automatically initialized between every pair of neighbours in a bridge after these items have been constructed In the Add connector step the connector can be transformed and CONNECTOR adjusted in various ways w Add connector Figure 2 32 The modelling steps for a connector 2 4 5 Stage 4 Finalise Overview The Finalise step offers an optional operation to remove and add small amounts of material on the entire restoration outer surface This is extremely useful for bridges however for single elements this feature is set by default and can therefore be skipped 2 4 6 Stage 5 Save Export Overview This is the last stage of the modelling process and it is this stage which saves the modelled 3D computer model of the dental restoration in a format suitable for production via computer aided production equipment Process
291. tly to the Windows Services where the 3Shape Dongle Service can be restarted as shown in Figure 5 6 207 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual Services File Action View Help gt msg aus Res Services Local RI eee ta a Mier ee Restart Service 3Shape Dongle Service Name Description Status Startup Type Log On As Sa NET Runtime Optimization Microsoft Manual Local System Stop the service E a 35hape Dongle Service Started Automatic Pause th he EN m amp amp Alerter Notifies sel Disabled Local Service take v S amp s Application Layer Gatewa Provides s Started Manual Local Service Figure 5 6 Restarting the 3Shape Dongle Service in the Windows Services form 5 3 7 Data output directories NOTE In the 3Shape Dental System the order data and the production data are placed in two separate locations The order data folder for a specific order will only contain files used internally by 3Shape Dental System applications whereas the production data folder manufacturing output will contain the modelled files used for further processing by CAM The content of the production folder can be reproduced based on the content of the order folder The applications must all know where to save orders and output models To specify the directories to which orders and output models are saved click the Browse buttons in Figure 5 7 to open up a file tre
292. tor occlusal see 80 and 81 Center shift back Shifting of center part of connector facial see 82 and 83 l The number of points in the connector control splines The default is 6 points as on the control Number of points dee splines in 71 to 73 me The approximate area of the sliced connector see area slice in Figure 2 88 located at the connector control splines 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark 243 Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com i Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved pe Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 User Manual 3sha pe The Connector item data specific for Silhouette connector shape types include Data Description Facial distance The approximate distance from the connector control splines to the facial side Palatial lingual dist The approximate distance from the connector control splines to the palatial lingual side Occlusal distance The approximate distance from the connector control splines to the occlusal side Counter occlusal dist The approximate distance from the connector control splines to the counter occlusal side The Connector item data specific for Circular and Elliptical connector shape types include Data Description Scale factor Scales the default connector control splines Shift back Move the origo of the connector control splines in the li
293. tton use the keys in Table 2 3 to change the 3D view Key Action ALT Pan view When pressed use the right mouse button to pan the view CTRL Rotate view When pressed use the right mouse button to rotate the view SHIFT Zoom view When pressed use the right mouse button to zoom in and out Table 2 3 Shortcuts for changing views using mouse and keyboard HINT It is strongly recommended that views be selected using the shortcuts described in Table 2 2 Leaving the Rotate View button in the Visualization toolbar permanently pressed is also advantageous Once the user becomes familiar with this procedure modelling speed will increase significantly For information on using other manipulation devices please see 2 7 DENTAL SYSTEM MOTION CONTROLLERS SUPPORT chapter 53 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved p 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape Visualization toolbar Finding the right point of view to work on a 3D model most effectively can be difficult and time consuming DentalDesigner comes with a set of tools and functions aimed to help the user to find the most advantageous visualization for each different situation The visualization tools and functions meant for use are often grouped together in the Visualization toolbar Among others they include functions and tools which Rotate the 3D view to preset angles this allows the user to visualize the models from the front back top botto
294. u will be able to choose Milling as manufacturing process in the Order Form MJ Dental System Control Panel Manufacturing process td Save e Back Navigation Home Material Settings Manufacturing process Edit Manufacturing process ID ManufacturingPraceesMilingGenerall Change ID Printing Name Active Manufacturing process file Cc amp pOutputRawSTL all Milling Additional milling information SS ee Hide inactive items Ie Dii too shape E Add Drill compensation nd Drill compensation offset PS rim COMPENSA QfTset o 1 500 a wn Drill radius 0 600 eif pi Move down Materials Mariufacturers Recycle bin Zirkon TF CPH lab Titan v Central milling center eg No isis Jespers By Restore all heme Michae j Empt the Recyrle Bin Details Total Active Figure 5 111 The manufacturing processes linking the manufacturers and the materials 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark 272 Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 User Manual 5 7 3 8 Connector sshape A new connector shape type Silhouette is made available This connector shapes according to the contour of the neighboring elements and is considered extremely powerful providing good initial connector shapes It is recommended to move the default provided Silhouette connector item
295. ual is to direct the user through the main functions and interfaces of the software It is assumed the reader is familiar with the Windows operating environment The Software described in the manual is covered by Terms and Conditions according to the End User License Agreement issued either by 3Shape A S or by the Partner of 3Shape A S by whom you have acquired this Partners particular version of the Software This manual covers the 3Shape Dental System Some functionalities may be included and some may not be included in your particular version Thus there may be visualisations and functionality described in this manual which will not apply to your software version The DentalManager DentalDesigner ScanItRestoration ScanItLibrary and Dental System Control Panel applications are generally all included in the software suite however AbutmentDesigner and DentalManager Manufacturing and Inbox add on modules may not be included and may require additional license fee if applicable If you have questions regarding the content of your particular software version please contact your software provider 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark 2 Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved p 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3sha pies Table of contents LDENESLMEANAGER S ibit viis tua E Pe Pes tuve Tix R Da ou ELM eR MERI ORG E d 8 1 1
296. umber of orders checkbox allows to define the number of visible orders by default The lesser number of displayed orders will improve the overall performance of the application Send Options When the Send patient name checkbox is marked ERP When ERP Export checkbox is marked it allows to export ERP files to the specified folder A powerful extension to the 3Shape dental system is the ability to share one common database among several computers enabling improved capacity and efficiency A typical case will be one scanning PC and one design PC working simultaneously To setup the common database both PC s need to be configured to point to the same database setup as shown in Figure 5 16 Please note a shared databases normally requires a common 3Shape Dongle Service please refer to section 5 3 6 and a shared installation please refer to section 0 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark 214 Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved P Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 User Manual 3sha pe 5 5 2 Manufacturing Inbox The DentalManager Inbox Module supports multiple FTP servers for high load central production The module allows handling orders created and sent from customers In order for the Inbox to be functional an operational FTP server must be availabled The Manufacturing Inbox settings are depicted in Figure 5 17 5 5 3 Inbox Fold
297. unit instead of Standard see Figure 2 121 The selected teeth will now turn blue e After selecting the individual teeth you need to indicate that there will be a wax up bridge Select the teeth you want to connect and click on Wax up on the right to the Bridge button Under Type select Wax up bridge see Figure 2 122 e Finally click on the Bridge button The selected teeth are now connected see Figure 2 123 and the user can move on to the design phase Ie Order Form Lab information Order settings Scan settings Operator Order number 20070608_1652 Lab Martin s Lab iv Extern Order number Ankagonist Importance Normal v Double preparation Clinic information XN I I Relative position pins Default cinic Order settings Contact person Order date 08 06 2007 iv Delivery date 09 06 2007 iv Clinic order na t Delivery type Ship En different address Shipping address Method Standard ivl Coping zr Patient information Last name First name Reference d g QD d G G S Comments esee QRO g E Type Circular Emm f P T E A Index Additional b Figure 2 120 Selecting the teeth 115 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved h P 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3snape
298. utment Figure 5 91 Abutment export options These options allows the user to specify how abutments designed using the abutment kit in question should be exported The effect of these obtains are as follows a Use implant coordinates If this option is checked the final abutment geometry will be stored in the common coordinate system of the implant system parts See below for a comprehensive desrcription of this coordinate system If this option is not checked the final implant will be stored in the coordinate system of the preparation scan used for designing the abutment b Keep base When this option is checked the base geometry will be removed from the exported model and replaced with a planar surface This allows the use of milling blanks with pre milled base geometry c Append hole patches When this option is checked the the screw hole of the abutment will be closed in the exported geometry This allows the use of milling blanks with pre drilled screw holes 5 Save and close the control panel When creating a new order it will be possible to select the new implant system and kit 5 6 5 19 Crowns The Crown item identifies a material bound crown construction element The Crown construction element differs from the other elements described previously in this chapter i e copings telescopes etc with regards to how the items are constructed and how they are displayed in the Control Panel The Crown items do n
299. w E je 5 2 o I Position 3shape gt i C Measure NI Area Figure 2 124 Modelling the full wax up bridge Rotation angle 119 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved p 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape 2 5 14 Crown This section describes the operations involved in the modelling of a crown Hereby we make a difference between a full crown design see Figure 2 125 and a two layer crown crown and coping design see Figure 2 126 It is important to note that the user has to decide to model a full crown or a two layer crown while filling in the order form Section 2 5 14 3 focuses on modelling crown bridges Ej Order Form Lab information Order details Scan settings Operator z Order number d1000_20080926_1337 Importance Normal v Antagonist Client information Double preparation Relative position Client John Doe Contact person Create date 9 26 2008 Order details Shipping date 9 26 2008 Patient information ges we Last name First name amp Ig gt pM amp e 3 ey Index Additional Figure 2 125 Full crown order form model an anatomical non reduced crown 120 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual Order Form Lab information Operator J oh
300. w in Figure 4 12 Optionally the user can create custom point groups by clicking New 5 grove cusp points added Optionally add more Optionally click on New to add custom point groups Point Groups g Lingual cusp points E Facial cusp points Figure 4 12 Add lower boundary and morph points to a crown scan 4 5 Load a Scan A scan in a library can also be loaded Click on the button 39 on the main toolbar and the form for opening a scan will pop up as show in Figure 4 Select a tooth for which the scan already exists and click on OK the scan will be opened If the selected library is a crown library but the selected tooth does not exist the user will have the option of importing a scan from a disk file 199 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual ScanitPontic File Help Figure 4 13 Order Form Library j 9 Pontic O Crown Order details e e e iR e S g Load a scan el egcg ener amp amp I Scanned Selected 200 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved b 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape 5 Dental System Control Panel 5 1 Foreword This chapter deals more exclusively with the customisation features available for the DentalManager ScanItRestoration and DentalDesigner applications The 3Shape Dental System Control Panel
301. when naming construction elements e g connectors a descriptive name could be Round and Oval or 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark 223 Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 User Manual sshape Connector Round and Connector Oval Less descriptive is for instance Connector1 and Connector2 or worse Item1 and Item2 Change ID Change ID Please select a valid unique ID ID IDOperator 1 Cancel Figure 5 25 Change ID dialog 5 6 2 5 6 3 Contact data The contact data only involves countries and operators users of the applications in 3Shape Dental System 5 6 3 1 Countries The Country items identify countries to be used in the site data The Country item data interface is illustrated below Edit Country Country2 Change ID Figure 5 26 Country item data interface 5 6 3 2 Operators The Operator items identify the users of the 3Shape Dental System appliations These operators can be chosen on the Order Form and optionally the names of the operators can be part of the order ID The Operator item data interface is illustrated below Edit Operator ID IDOperator1 Figure 5 27 Operator item data interface 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark 224 Phone 45 70 27
302. will appear e DentalDesigner automatically creates an initial telescope to be modified by the user During the modelling the primary telescope consists of two separate parts the basis coping and the telescope cone grey as illustrated in 2D 107 Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved b 3Shape Dental System 2008 1 User Manual 3shape in Figure 2 103 The basis coping defines the shape of the telescope rim and guarantees minimum distance between the final telescope surface and the interface The basis coping settings can be adjusted on the Base coping settings group which contains the same options as a regular coping see section 2 4 4 2 for an explanation of the parameters After the modelling the telescope surface will replace the basis coping overlay surface as visualized in Figure 2 100 e The upper and lower limits of the telescope cone are defined by the shape of the blue upper and lower control points o The upper control points define the transition between the angular telescope cone and the curved telescope top The shape can be adjusted both manually with the mouse and via the dialog box Manually the control points can be dragged along the telescope cone surface Figure 2 96 and points can be added right click on the blue line and choose Add or removed Figure 2 97 Figure 2 96 Mouse move upper control points Figure 2 97 Add upper control points o The lower control points define
303. y be renaming one of the elements within the Control Panel However it could also be that your Software provider has changed some of the settings in order to provide better default settings to you NOTE In general we recommend that you update all settings press Update all or Update individual settings as this is the only way to automatically obtain optimized settings provided to you However this may affect your preferred settings so it is always recommended to inspect all Material settings after an upgrade procedure as discussed in section 0 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark 265 Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved gt Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 User Manual 3sha pe 5 7 1 7 Updating site settings NOTE As part of the upgrade process your site will automatically be allocated with a globrally unique ID specified by the dongle meaning that the ID of your site will change The ID typically consists of 5 random digits e g 41393 making it ideal for barcode printing The main purpose of this new ID is to facilitate the possibility of sending orders between sites and it will be your global ID for future reference 5 2 Floating licenses Previous versions of the 3Shape Dental System required a physical dongle with the license information to be available in the computer All the applications in the 3
304. your distributor to learn more of the available processes For each Manufacturing process it is possible to define some manufacturing specific settings e g drill radius of a milling machine NOTE Changing the provided settings can have a significent effect on the quality of the manufactured construction elements please contact your distributor prior to making changes The Manufacturing process items combines the manufacturing processes with the available manufacturers as specified in section 5 6 4 1 and materials as specified in section 5 6 4 2 As seen in 34 it is possible to specify which of the defined manufacturers have the current manufacturing process and for which materials this process is available at the manufacturer 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark 229 Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 User Manual Dental System Control Panel Manufacturing process Save E Back Navigation Home Material Settings Manufacturing process Edit Manufacturing process Milling Printing ID ManufacturingProceesMilingGenerall JP Marre Milling Manufacturing process file i ADGutputRawsTL alll Select miling Additional milling information Dirill tool shape Sphere dp Add See oil compensation E Copy Erill cormpensation offset 1 500 ral miri x Delete Grill
305. ystem and should not be changed 5 6 4 2 Materials The Material items identify materials to be used in the construction element items The Material item data interface is illustrated below 3Shape A S Holmens Kanal 7 4 1060 Copenhagen K Denmark Phone 45 70 27 26 20 Fax 45 70 27 26 21 E mail support 3shape com Copyright 2000 2008 3Shape A S All rights reserved gt Dental System Control Panel 2008 1 User Manual 3sha pe Edit Material IL Materiall Change ID External ID for interfacing with third MERERI party software r Use colors Figure 5 33 Material item data interface Each Material item may have an external ID which is used when interfacing with third parties e g a central manufacturing site Also an optional Shader material may be chosen for improved visualization of the construction elements in DentalDesigner For the Material item in Figure 5 33 validation is enabled This allows the user of DentalDesigner to check the connector and coping thickness of a given construction element to verify that the designed element is suitable for production using the current material 5 6 4 3 Manufacturing processes The Manufacturing process items specifies how the construction elements are produced The users of the Dental System applications have one of more manufacturing processes available e g milling machines 3D printers or sintering systems please contact

Dental System by 3 shape

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents